615691
1
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/217
Pagina verder
1
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
© CANON INC. 2015 CEL-SW2PA210
Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions”
(
=
14) section, before using the camera.
Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.
Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
: Page before you clicked a link
To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.
Camera User Guide
ENGLISH
2
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Initial Information
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.
Camera
Battery Pack
NB-13L*
Battery Charger
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
Neck Strap Strap Adapter
* Do not peel off the adhesive covering from a battery pack.
Printed matter is also included.
A memory card is not included (
=
2).
Compatible Memory Cards
The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of
capacity.
SD memory cards*
1
SDHC memory cards*
1
*
2
SDXC memory cards*
1
*
2
*1 Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been
veried to work with the camera.
*2 UHS-I memory cards are also supported.
Before Use
3
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Conventions in This Guide
In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
Numbers in parentheses indicate the numbers of corresponding
controls in “Part Names” (
=
4).
[ ] Control ring (13) on front
[ ] Front dial (3) on front
[ ] Up button (11) on back
[ ] Left button (12) on back
[ ] Right button (17) on back
[ ] Down button (19) on back
[ ] Control dial (18) on back
Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in
brackets.
: Important information you should know
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
: Indicates touch-screen operations
=
xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
The symbols “
Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information
Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
and afliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded
images or copyrighted music and images with music in the memory
card for anything other than private enjoyment. Refrain from
unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note that
even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright or
other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some
commercial settings.
For information on camera warranty or Canon Customer Support,
please refer to the warranty information provided with your camera
User Manual Kit.
Although the screen (monitor) and viewnder are produced under
extremely high-precision manufacturing conditions and more than
99.99% of the pixels meet design specications, in rare cases some
pixels may be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does
not indicate camera damage or affect recorded images.
When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage.
4
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
(
3
)
(
15
)
(
17
)
(
18
)
(
19
)
(
20
)
(
7
)
(
6
)
(
5
)
(
4
)
(
16
)
(
9
)
(
11
)
(
12
)
(
14
)
(
13
)
(
10
)
(
8
)
(
2
)(
1
)
(1) Screen (monitor)*
2
(2) Viewfinder
(3) ON/OFF button
(4) Remote switch terminal
(5) DIGITAL terminal
(6) HDMI
TM
terminal
(7) [
(Mobile Device Connection)]
button
(8) Serial number (Body number)
(9) Movie button
(10) [
] / [ (Single-image erase)]
button
(11) [
(One Shot/Servo)] /
[
(Drive mode)] / [ (Wi-Fi)] /
Up button
(12) [
(Macro)] / [ (Manual focus)]
/ Left button
(13) Indicator
(14) [
(Playback)] button
(15) [
(AF frame selector)] /
[
(Story Highlights)] button
(16) [
(Quick Set menu/Set)] button
(17) [
(Flash)] / Right button
(18) Control dial
(19) [
(Information)] / Down
button
(20) [
] button
z You can turn the control dial to perform
most of the operations possible with the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons, such as choosing
items and switching images.
Part Names
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
9
)
(
10
)
(
5
)
(
8
)(
7
)(
6
)(
5
)
(
11
)
(
12
)
(
14
)
(
16
)
(
15
) (
17
) (
18
)
(
1
)
(
13
)
(1) Lens
(2) Lamp
(3) Front dial
(4) Zoom lever
Shooting: [
(telephoto)] /
[
(wide angle)]
Playback: [
(magnify)] /
[
(index)]
(5) Strap mount
(6) Exposure compensation dial
(7) Shutter button
(8) Flash
(9) Hot shoe
(10) Diopter adjustment dial
(11) Mode dial
(12) Speaker
(13) Control ring
(14) Microphone
(15)
(N-Mark)*
1
(16) Tripod socket
(17) Memory card/battery cover
(18) DC coupler terminal cover
*1 Used with NFC features (
=
134).
*2 Gestures may not be detected as easily if you apply a screen protector. In this
case, increase the sensitivity of the touch-screen panel (
=
164).
5
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Table of Contents
Before Use
Initial Information .............................................................. 2
Package Contents .................................................................... 2
Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information ................................. 3
Conventions in This Guide ....................................................... 3
Part Names .............................................................................. 4
Common Camera Operations ................................................ 12
Safety Precautions ................................................................. 14
Basic Guide
Basic Operations............................................................. 17
Touch-Screen Operations....................................................... 17
Touching ....................................................................................17
Dragging ....................................................................................17
Initial Preparations.................................................................. 18
Attaching the Strap .................................................................... 18
Holding the Camera ...................................................................18
Charging the Battery Pack .........................................................18
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card ...................19
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card .....................20
Using the Screen .......................................................................20
Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation ..........................20
Setting the Date and Time ......................................................... 20
Changing the Date and Time .................................................21
Display Language ...................................................................... 22
Trying the Camera Out ........................................................... 22
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................22
Viewing ......................................................................................24
Erasing Images .....................................................................25
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics ................................................................ 26
On/Off ..................................................................................... 26
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ............................. 27
Power Saving in Shooting Mode ...........................................27
Power Saving in Playback Mode ........................................... 27
Shutter Button ........................................................................ 27
Using the Viewnder .............................................................. 28
Shooting Modes ..................................................................... 29
Shooting Display Options ....................................................... 29
Using the Quick Set Menu...................................................... 30
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure Settings .............30
Using the Menu Screen .......................................................... 31
Touch-Screen Operations ..........................................................32
On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 32
Indicator Display ..................................................................... 33
Clock ...................................................................................... 34
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ...................................... 35
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings .......................... 35
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................35
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode ................................................... 37
Digest Movie Playback ..........................................................38
Still Images/Movies ...............................................................38
Still Images ............................................................................ 38
Movies ...................................................................................38
Scene Icons ............................................................................... 39
Continuous Shooting Scenes ................................................40
Image Stabilization Icons ...........................................................40
6
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting .........................................................................55
Customizing Camera Operation ............................................. 55
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing ...............................55
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from Lighting Up ......56
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots .......................... 56
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots ...................56
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots .........................57
Other Shooting Modes .................................................... 58
Applying Effects Automatically (Creative Shot) ...................... 58
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot ...........................58
Choosing Effects .......................................................................59
Recording Movies with a Variety of Effects................................59
Creative Shot Movie Playback ..............................................59
Specic Scenes ...................................................................... 60
Applying Special Effects ......................................................... 61
Shooting Yourself under Optimal Settings (Self Portrait) ...........61
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes (High Dynamic Range) ...........62
Adding Artistic Effects ............................................................ 63
Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic) ....................................63
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect) ............ 63
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect) .............64
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips) ...........................................................64
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect) ...........65
Making Subjects Stand Out (Background Defocus) ..................65
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect ..............................................66
Shooting in Monochrome ...........................................................66
Special Modes for Other Purposes ........................................ 67
Shooting Starry Skies (Star) ...................................................... 67
Shooting People against Starry Skies (Star Portrait) ............67
On-Screen Frames ....................................................................41
Common, Convenient Features ............................................. 41
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) .......................... 41
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom) ........................42
Using the Self-Timer .................................................................. 42
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake .......................43
Customizing the Self-Timer ...................................................43
Shooting by Touching the Screen (Touch Shutter) ....................43
Continuous Shooting .................................................................44
Image Display during Playback .............................................44
Using Face ID......................................................................... 45
Personal Information .................................................................45
Registering Face ID Information ................................................ 46
Shooting ....................................................................................47
Checking and Editing Registered Information ...........................48
Overwriting and Adding Face Information .............................48
Erasing Registered Information ............................................. 49
Image Customization Features .............................................. 50
Changing the Aspect Ratio ........................................................ 50
Changing Image Quality ............................................................ 50
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury Lamps ...........51
Changing Movie Image Quality .................................................51
For NTSC Video ....................................................................51
For PAL Video ........................................................................52
Helpful Shooting Features ...................................................... 52
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level ......................................... 52
Magnifying the Area in Focus ....................................................53
Checking for Closed Eyes .........................................................53
Deactivating Auto Level ............................................................. 54
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 54
Deactivating Image Stabilization ...........................................54
7
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Image Colors .......................................................................... 82
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance) ................................82
Custom White Balance .......................................................... 82
Manually Correcting White Balance ......................................82
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) ................................83
Custom Color.........................................................................84
Shooting Range and Focusing ............................................... 84
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro) .....................................................84
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode ............................................... 85
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking) ....................86
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode) ...................................86
Digital Tele-Converter ................................................................87
Choosing the AF Method ........................................................... 87
1-point AF ..............................................................................87
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point AF) .......................88
+Tracking ............................................................................88
Shooting with Servo AF .............................................................89
Changing the Focus Setting ......................................................89
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select) ......................... 89
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF) .............................. 90
Shooting with the AF Lock ......................................................... 91
Flash....................................................................................... 91
Changing the Flash Mode .........................................................91
Auto .......................................................................................91
On ..........................................................................................91
Slow Synchro ........................................................................92
Off .......................................................................................... 92
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation ............................92
Shooting with the FE Lock ......................................................... 93
Changing the Flash Timing ........................................................93
Other Settings ........................................................................ 94
Changing Image Quality ............................................................ 94
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies
(Star Nightscape) ..................................................................68
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails) ...........................................69
Shooting Movies of Star Movement
(Star Time-Lapse Movie) .......................................................70
Adjusting Colors ....................................................................72
Adjusting the Focus ............................................................... 72
Recording Various Movies ...................................................... 73
Recording Movies in [ ] Mode .................................................73
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Recording .... 74
Disabling
Auto Slow Shutter .................................................74
Correcting Severe Camera Shake .............................................75
Sound Settings ..........................................................................75
Deactivating the Wind Filter ..................................................75
Using the Attenuator .............................................................. 75
Recording Short Clips ................................................................75
Playback Effects ....................................................................76
Recording iFrame Movies ..........................................................76
P Mode ............................................................................. 77
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) ....................................... 77
Image Brightness (Exposure) ................................................. 78
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) ............ 78
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock) ......................78
Changing the Metering Method .................................................78
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame ................79
Changing the ISO Speed ...........................................................79
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings ..................................................80
Changing the Noise Reduction Level (High ISO NR) ................ 80
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting) ...............................80
Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction) .........................81
Shadow Correct .....................................................................81
Adjusting Auto ND Filter Settings ..............................................81
8
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images
(Digest Movies) ........................................................................108
Viewing by Date ...................................................................109
Checking People Detected in Face ID .....................................109
Browsing and Filtering Images ............................................. 109
Navigating through Images in an Index ................................... 109
Touch-Screen Operations .................................................... 110
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions ....................... 110
Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images ........................ 111
Touch-Screen Operations .................................................... 111
Viewing Individual Images in a Group ..................................... 112
Editing Face ID Information ................................................... 113
Changing Names ..................................................................... 113
Erasing Names ........................................................................ 113
Image Viewing Options .........................................................114
Magnifying Images .................................................................. 114
Touch-Screen Operations .................................................... 114
Viewing Slideshows ................................................................. 114
Protecting Images .................................................................115
Using the Menu ....................................................................... 115
Choosing Images Individually .................................................. 116
Selecting a Range ................................................................... 116
Protecting All Images at Once ................................................. 117
Clearing All Protection at Once ........................................... 117
Erasing Images .....................................................................118
Erasing Multiple Images at Once ............................................. 118
Choosing a Selection Method ............................................. 118
Choosing Images Individually .............................................. 119
Selecting a Range ............................................................... 119
Specifying All Images at Once ............................................. 119
Rotating Images ................................................................... 120
Using the Menu .......................................................................120
Capturing in RAW Format .....................................................94
Using the Menu .....................................................................95
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 95
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode ..................................................... 96
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)...................................... 96
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) ..................................... 97
Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode) ..... 97
Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb)............................................ 98
Adjusting the Flash Output ..................................................... 99
Recording Movies at Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ..................................................................................... 99
Customizing Controls and Display ....................................... 100
Customizing Display Information ............................................. 100
Customizing the Information Displayed ............................... 101
Assigning Functions to Controls .............................................. 101
Customizing the Quick Set Menu ......................................... 102
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu ...................................102
Rearranging Menu Items ..................................................... 103
Saving Shooting Settings ..................................................... 103
Settings That Can Be Saved ...............................................103
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items (My Menu) .....104
Playback Mode .............................................................. 105
Viewing ................................................................................. 105
Touch-Screen Operations ....................................................106
Switching Display Modes .........................................................107
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) .................... 107
Histogram ............................................................................107
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display .......................... 107
Viewing Short Movies Recorded in Creative Shot Mode
(Creative Shot Movies) ............................................................ 108
9
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu ..........................137
Using Another Access Point ....................................................139
Previous Access Points ...........................................................139
Saving Images to a Computer .............................................. 140
Preparing to Register a Computer ........................................... 140
Checking Your Computer Environment ...............................140
Installing the Software .........................................................140
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only) ...................................................................141
Saving Images to a Connected Computer ...............................141
Conrming Access Point Compatibility ................................ 141
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points ...............................142
Connecting to Listed Access Points ....................................144
Previous Access Points .......................................................144
Sending Images to a Registered Web Service ..................... 145
Registering Web Services .......................................................145
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY ..............................145
Registering Other Web Services .........................................147
Uploading Images to Web Services ........................................147
Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer .......... 148
Sending Images to Another Camera .................................... 149
Image Sending Options ........................................................ 150
Sending Multiple Images .........................................................150
Choosing Images Individually ..............................................150
Selecting a Range ...............................................................151
Sending Favorite Images ....................................................151
Notes on Sending Images .......................................................152
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) ........152
Adding Comments ................................................................... 152
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync) ....................... 153
Initial Preparations ................................................................... 153
Preparing the Camera .........................................................153
Deactivating Auto Rotation ......................................................120
Tagging Images as Favorites ............................................... 121
Using the Menu .......................................................................121
Convenient Control: Touch Actions ...................................... 122
Using Touch Actions Functions ................................................122
Changing Touch Actions Functions .........................................122
Assignable Functions ..........................................................122
Editing Still Images ............................................................... 123
Resizing Images ......................................................................123
Using the Menu .......................................................................123
Cropping ..................................................................................124
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) ..............................125
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) ................................ 125
Correcting Red-Eye .................................................................126
Editing Movies ...................................................................... 127
Reducing File Sizes ................................................................. 128
Image Quality of Compressed Movies ................................128
Erasing Movie Chapters ..........................................................128
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights) ....................................... 129
Choosing Themes for Albums .............................................129
Adding Background Music to Albums ...................................... 130
Creating Your Own Albums ......................................................131
Combining Short Clips.......................................................... 132
Wi-Fi Functions ............................................................. 133
Available Wi-Fi Features ...................................................... 133
Sending Images to a Smartphone ........................................ 134
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone .............134
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or
in Shooting Mode ................................................................134
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode ... 136
Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button ...................136
10
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Customizing Sounds ................................................................164
Start-Up Screen ....................................................................... 164
Hiding Hints and Tips ...............................................................164
Adjusting the Touch-Screen Panel ..........................................164
Metric / Non-Metric Display .....................................................164
Checking Certication Logos ................................................... 165
Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images .................165
Deleting All Copyright Information .......................................165
Adjusting Other Settings .......................................................... 165
Restoring Default Camera Settings ......................................... 165
Accessories ................................................................... 167
System Map ......................................................................... 168
Optional Accessories ............................................................ 169
Power Supplies ........................................................................169
Flash Units ...............................................................................169
Other Accessories ...................................................................170
Printers ....................................................................................170
Photo and Movie Storage ........................................................ 170
Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 170
Playback on a TV ....................................................................170
Powering the Camera with Household Power ......................... 171
Inserting and Charging the Battery Pack.............................. 172
Using a Computer to Charge the Battery ............................173
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately) ..............................174
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately) ..............................174
Speedlite EX Series ............................................................174
Using Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 (Sold Separately) .............. 175
Camera Settings Available with an External Flash
(Sold Separately) .................................................................175
Using the Software ............................................................... 176
Computer Connections via a Cable ......................................... 176
Preparing the Computer ......................................................153
Sending Images .......................................................................154
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone.....154
Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control
the Camera........................................................................... 155
Geotagging Images on the Camera ........................................155
Shooting Remotely ..................................................................155
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings.......................................... 156
Editing Connection Information ...............................................156
Changing a Device Nickname .............................................157
Erasing Connection Information ..........................................157
Changing the Camera Nickname ........................................157
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default ...................................158
Setting Menu .................................................................. 159
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions ...................................... 159
Date-Based Image Storage ..................................................... 159
File Numbering ........................................................................159
Formatting Memory Cards ....................................................... 160
Low-Level Formatting .......................................................... 160
Changing the Video System ....................................................160
Electronic Level Calibration ..................................................... 161
Resetting the Electronic Level ............................................. 161
Switching the Color of Screen Information ..............................161
Using Eco Mode ......................................................................161
Power-Saving Adjustment .......................................................162
Screen Brightness ...................................................................162
World Clock .............................................................................162
Date and Time .........................................................................163
Lens Retraction Timing ............................................................ 163
Display Language .................................................................... 163
Silencing Camera Operations ..................................................163
Adjusting the Volume ...............................................................164
11
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Functions and Menu Tables ................................................. 193
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode ...........................193
Quick Set Menu .......................................................................196
Shooting Tab ............................................................................199
[
1] Tab .............................................................................199
[
2] Tab .............................................................................201
[
3] Tab .............................................................................202
[
4] Tab .............................................................................203
[
5] Tab .............................................................................204
[
6] Tab .............................................................................206
[
7] Tab .............................................................................206
[
8] Tab .............................................................................207
Set Up Tab ............................................................................... 207
My Menu Tab ...........................................................................208
Playback Tab ...........................................................................208
Print Tab ..................................................................................209
Handling Precautions ........................................................... 209
Specications ....................................................................... 210
Camera .................................................................................... 210
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time .................. 211
Shooting Range ....................................................................... 211
Number of Shots per Memory Card .........................................212
Recording Time per Memory Card ..........................................212
Battery Pack NB-13L ...............................................................213
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE .........................................213
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E ......................213
Index..................................................................................... 214
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions ........................................ 216
Radio Wave Interference Precautions ..................................... 216
Security Precautions ................................................................216
Trademarks and Licensing ..................................................217
Disclaimer ............................................................................217
Checking Your Computer Environment ...............................176
Installing the Software .........................................................177
Saving Images to a Computer ................................................. 177
Printing Images .................................................................... 178
Easy Print ................................................................................178
Conguring Print Settings ........................................................ 179
Cropping Images before Printing .........................................180
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing ...............180
Available Layout Options ..................................................... 181
Printing ID Photos ...............................................................181
Printing Movie Scenes ............................................................. 181
Movie Printing Options ........................................................181
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) ..................................182
Conguring Print Settings ....................................................182
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images ............................182
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images .......................... 183
Setting Up Printing for All Images ........................................183
Clearing All Images from the Print List ................................183
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF) .................. 183
Adding Images to a Photobook ...............................................184
Choosing a Selection Method .............................................184
Adding Images Individually ..................................................184
Adding All Images to a Photobook ......................................184
Removing All Images from a Photobook .............................184
Appendix ........................................................................ 185
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 185
On-Screen Messages........................................................... 189
On-Screen Information ......................................................... 191
Shooting (Information Display) ................................................191
Battery Level .......................................................................191
Playback (Detailed Information Display) ..................................192
Summary of Movie Control Panel ........................................193
12
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Common Camera Operations
Shoot
Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
-
=
35,
=
37
See several effects applied to each shot, using camera-determined
settings (Creative Shot Mode)
-
=
58
Shoot yourself under optimal settings (Self Portrait)
-
=
61
Shooting people well
Portraits
(
=
60)
Matching specic scenes
Night Scenes
(
=
60)
Starry Skies
(
=
67)
Fireworks
(
=
60)
Applying special effects
Vivid Colors
(
=
61)
Poster Effect
(
=
61)
“Aged” Photos
(
=
63)
Fish-Eye Effect
(
=
63)
Miniature Effect
(
=
64)
Toy Camera Effect
(
=
65)
Background Defocus
(
=
65)
Soft Focus
(
=
66)
Monochrome
(
=
66)
Focus on faces
-
=
35,
=
60,
=
88,
=
89
Without using the ash (Flash Off)
-
=
35
Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
-
=
42
Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)
-
=
37
13
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Save
Save images to a computer
-
=
177
Use Wi-Fi Functions
Send images to a smartphone
-
=
134
Share images online
-
=
145
Send images to a computer
-
=
153
View
View images (Playback Mode)
-
=
105
Automatic playback (Slideshow)
-
=
114
On a TV
-
=
170
On a computer
-
=
176
Browse through images quickly
-
=
109
Erase images
-
=
118
Create an album automatically
-
=
129
Record/View Movies
Record movies
-
=
35,
=
73,
=
99
View movies (Playback Mode)
-
=
105
Print
Print pictures
-
=
178
14
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects
inside.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the
battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.
If your model has a viewnder or interchangeable lens, do not look
through the viewnder or lens at bright light sources (such as the sun
on a clear day, or a bright articial light source).
This may damage your eyesight.
If your model has an interchangeable lens, do not leave the lens (or
the camera with the lens attached) in the sun without the lens cap on.
This could result in a re.
Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in.
This could result in electrical shock or re. Immediately stop using the
product and distance yourself from it.
Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct ame.
This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in
electrical shock, re, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into
contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately ush with water.
If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.
- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any
dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power
outlet, and the surrounding area.
- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.
- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if
the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet.
- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if
your product uses one.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
Safety Precautions
Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions
described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.
The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and
other persons from being injured or incurring property damage.
Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
Warning
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
Do not trigger the ash in close proximity to people’s eyes.
Exposure to the intense light produced by the ash could damage
eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet) away from infants
when using the ash.
Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a
child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
The hot shoe cover is dangerous if swallowed. If this occurs, contact a
doctor immediately.
Use only recommended power sources.
Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.
Do not peel off the adhesive covering, if the battery pack has it.
Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when
dropped.
Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
15
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
When using optional lenses, lens lters, or lter adapters (if
applicable), be sure to attach these accessories rmly.
If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the
shards of glass may lead to cuts.
On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, make sure to
avoid pinching your ngers with the lowering ash.
This could result in injury.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense articial light source.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, do not push
the ash down or pry it open.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the ash with a
cotton swab or cloth.
The heat emitted from the ash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to malfunction.
Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to re or explosions.
Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do
not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in re.
Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate
caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices
is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended
periods.
Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature
burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot
places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of injury.
When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it,
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other
objects.
Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
When using the ash, be careful not to cover it with your ngers or
clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the ash.
Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:
- Places subject to direct sunlight
- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
- Humid or dusty places
These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, re, burns, or other injuries.
Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, re, burns, or
other injuries.
The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
16
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or
explosion, resulting in product damage or re.
If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –
terminals reversed.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not
come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it
faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.
Do not attach any hard objects to the product.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
17
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Touch-Screen Operations
The camera’s touch-screen panel enables intuitive operation simply by
touching or tapping the screen.
Touching
Touch the screen briey with your
nger.
z This gesture is used to shoot, congure
camera functions, and so on.
Dragging
Touch the screen and move your nger
across it.
z This gesture is used in Playback mode
to switch to the next image, or to change
the magnied image area, among other
operations.
Basic information and instructions, from initial
preparations to shooting and playback
Basic Guide
Basic Operations
18
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
1
Insert the battery pack.
z After aligning the marks on the battery
pack and charger, insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
2
Charge the battery pack.
z CB-2LH: Flip out the plug (1) and plug
the charger into a power outlet (2).
z CB-2LHE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
z The charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
z When charging is nished, the lamp turns
green.
3
Remove the battery pack.
z After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
CB-2LH
(
2
)
(
1
)
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching the Strap
1
Attach the strap adapter.
z Attach the included strap adapter to the
camera as shown.
z On the other side of the camera, attach
the adapter the same way.
2
Attach the strap.
z Attach the included strap to the camera
as shown.
z On the other side of the camera, attach
the strap the same way.
Holding the Camera
z Place the strap around your neck.
z When shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the ash, do not rest your ngers
on it.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
2
)
19
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
2
Insert the battery pack.
z Holding the battery pack with the terminals
in the position shown (1), hold the battery
lock toward (2) and insert the battery pack
toward (3) until the lock clicks shut.
z If you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always conrm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
3
Check your card’s write-protect
switch and insert the memory card.
z Recording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect switch when the
switch is in the locked position. Move the
switch toward (1).
z Insert the memory card with the label (2)
facing as shown until it clicks into place.
z Make sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
4
Close the cover.
z Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the
closed position (2).
For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be
saved on one memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory
Card” (
=
212).
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (
=
211).
Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
As a visual reminder of the charge status, attach the battery cover
with
visible on a charged battery pack and concealed on an
uncharged one.
The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory
Card
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a memory card that is new or has been formatted
in another device, you should format the memory card with this camera
(
=
160).
1
Open the cover.
z Slide the switch (1) and open the cover
(2).
(
2
)
(
1
)
20
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation
z You can adjust the angle and orientation
of the screen as needed, to suit shooting
conditions.
z To protect the screen when the camera
is not in use, always keep it closed and
facing the camera body.
Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will
deactivate the viewnder. Similarly, close the screen (facing the
camera body) to deactivate it and activate the viewnder.
When including yourself in shots, you can view a mirror image
of yourself by rotating the screen around toward the front of the
camera. To cancel reverse display, press the [
] button,
choose [Reverse Display] on the [
1] tab, press the [ ] button,
and then press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [Off].
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
1
Turn the camera on.
z Press the ON/OFF button.
z The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
z Open the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
z The battery pack will pop up.
Remove the memory card.
z Push the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
z The memory card will pop up.
Using the Screen
z Open the screen (1) and rotate it toward
the lens 180° (2).
z Close the screen in this orientation (3).
The screen can only open to approximately 175° in direction (1).
Be careful not to open the screen any further than this, as it will
damage the camera.
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
1
)
21
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
1
Access the menu screen.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [Date/Time].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ 2] tab.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Date/Time], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Change the date and time.
z Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
Time” (
=
20) to adjust the settings.
z Press the [
] button to close the
menu screen.
Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the
camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the
battery pack is removed.
The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insert a charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC
adapter kit (sold separately,
=
169), even if the camera is left
off.
Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (
=
20).
2
Set the date and time.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the date and time.
z When nished, press the [
] button.
3
Specify your home time zone.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
4
Finish the setup process.
z Press the [ ] button when nished.
After a conrmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
z To turn off the camera, press the ON/OFF
button.
Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [
] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [
] dial.
You can also set the date and time by touching the desired item
on the screen in step 2 and then touching [
][ ], followed
by [
]. Similarly, you can also set your home time zone by
touching [
][ ] on the screen in step 3, followed by [ ].
22
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Trying the Camera Out
Still Images
Movies
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or
movies, and then view them.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
1
Turn the camera on.
z Press the ON/OFF button.
z The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
z Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
z Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
3
Compose the shot.
z To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle).
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
1
Enter Playback mode.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Access the setting screen.
z Press and hold the [ ] button, and then
immediately press the [ ] button.
3
Set the display language.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after
pressing the [
] button before you press the [ ] button.
In this case, press the [
] button to dismiss the time display and
repeat step 2.
You can also change the display language by pressing the
[
] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ 3] tab.
You can also set the display language by touching a language on
the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.
23
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
z Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
z Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
z Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
2) Finish recording.
z Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
(
1
)
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
z Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
z If [Raise the ash] is displayed, lift the
ash with your ngers. It will re when
shooting. If you prefer not to use the
ash, push it down with your nger, into
the camera.
2) Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down.
z As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the ash, it res
automatically.
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
z After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
24
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
3
Play movies.
z Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button again.
z Playback now begins, and after the movie
is nished, [
] is displayed.
z To adjust the volume, press the [
][ ]
buttons during playback.
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
You can also start movie playback by touching [ ]. To adjust
the volume, quickly drag up or down across the screen during
playback.
Viewing
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Your last shot is displayed.
2
Choose images.
z To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [
] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
z Press and hold the [
][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
z To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [
] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
z To return to single-image display, press
the [
] button.
z Movies are identied by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
25
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Advanced Guide
Basic Guide
Erasing Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
1
Choose an image to erase.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
2
Erase the image.
z Press the [ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The current image is now erased.
z To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
You can choose multiple images to erase at once (
=
118).
You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (
=
122).
26
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
On/Off
Shooting Mode
z Press the ON/OFF button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
z To turn the camera off, press the ON/OFF
button again.
Playback Mode
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
z To turn the camera off, press the [
]
button again.
To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [ ]
button.
The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera
is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is
retracted by pressing the [
] button.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your
camera, including shooting and playback options
27
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Shutter Button
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
1
Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
2
Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to
shoot.)
z The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specic period of
inactivity.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of
inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera
turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when
the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway
(
=
27).
Power Saving in Playback Mode
The camera turns itself off automatically after about ve minutes of
inactivity.
You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
Display Off, if you prefer (
=
162).
Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other
devices via Wi-Fi (
=
133), or when connected to a computer
(
=
177).
28
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Although the viewnder is produced under extremely high-
precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the
pixels meet design specications, in rare cases some pixels may
be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does not
indicate camera damage or affect recorded images.
Some aspect ratio settings (
=
50) will cause black bars to be
displayed on the top and bottom or left and right edges of the
screen. These areas will not be recorded.
The screen will not be activated when you move your eye away
from the viewnder if you have selected MENU (
=
31) ► [ 1]
tab ► [Display settings] ► [Display Control] ► [Manual] and then
[Manual display] ► [Viewnder].
Motion is displayed more smoothly (both on the viewnder
and screen) in [
], [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode when
you select MENU (
=
31) ► [ 1] tab ► [Display Mode] ►
[Display priority] ► [Smooth]. At this time, setting [VF display] to
[Fast] makes motion on the viewnder even smoother but may
make motion on the screen choppier.
Display will switch to the camera screen during Wi-Fi
communication (
=
133) or when the on-screen keyboard is
displayed (
=
32).
You can congure display brightness (
=
162) for the viewnder
and camera screen separately.
To reduce the shooting screen, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 1]
tab ► [VF display format] ► [Display 2].
Using the Viewnder
Still Images
Movies
Shooting is easier with an electronic viewnder, which helps you
concentrate on keeping subjects in focus.
1
Switch between using the screen
and viewnder as needed.
z Moving the viewnder near your eye will
activate its display and deactivate the
camera screen.
z Moving the viewnder away from your
eye will deactivate its display and activate
the camera screen.
2
Adjust the diopter.
z Turn the dial to bring viewnder images
into sharp focus.
The viewnder display and camera screen cannot be activated at
the same time.
Touch operations on the camera screen are not possible while the
viewnder display is in use.
29
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Shooting Display Options
Press the [ ] button to show or hide the grid lines and electronic
level.
To congure the on-screen display in greater detail, access [ 1] tab ►
[Shooting information display] (
=
100).
Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will
deactivate the viewnder. Similarly, close the screen (facing
the camera body) to deactivate it and activate the viewnder
(
=
20).
Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
affect recorded images.
For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes”
(
=
107).
Shooting Modes
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(1) P, Tv, Av, M, and C Modes
Take a variety of shots using
your preferred settings (
=
77,
=
96).
(2) Movie Mode
For shooting movies (
=
73,
=
99).
You can also shoot movies when
the mode dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing the
movie button.
(3) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(
=
22,
=
35,
=
37).
(4) Creative Shot Mode
See several effects applied to
each shot automatically (
=
58).
(5) Special Scene Mode
Shoot with settings designed for
specic scenes, or add a variety of
effects (
=
60).
30
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
4
Conrm your choice and exit.
z Press the [ ] button.
z The screen before you pressed the
[
] button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you congured.
To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
165).
You can also exit by choosing [
] in the menu items and
pressing the [
] button.
Using Touch-Screen Operations to Congure
Settings
z Touch [ ] in the upper right of the screen
to access the Quick Set menu.
z Touch a menu item and then an option to
complete the setting.
z To return to the previous screen, touch
the [
] menu item, or touch the selected
option again.
z You can access the screen for items
labeled with a [
] icon by touching
[ ].
z You can access the screen for items
labeled with a [
] icon by touching
[ ].
z You can access the screen for items
labeled with a [
] icon by touching [ ].
Using the Quick Set Menu
Congure commonly used functions in the (Quick Set) menu.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(
=
196).
1
Access the menu.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a menu item.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
menu item (1).
z Available options (2) are shown at the
bottom of the screen.
3
Choose an option.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
or [ ] dial to choose an option.
z Items labeled with a [
] icon can
be congured by pressing the [ ]
button.
z Items labeled with a [
] icon can
be congured by pressing the [ ]
button.
z Items labeled with a [
] icon can be
congured by pressing the [ ] button.
(
1
) (
2
)
31
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
3
Choose a menu item.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button.
z For menu items with options not shown,
rst press the [
] button to switch
screens, and then either press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to select the
menu item.
z To return to the previous screen, press
the [
] button.
4
Choose an option.
z When options are listed vertically, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose an option.
z When options are listed horizontally,
press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
5
Conrm your choice and exit.
z Press the [ ] button to conrm your
choice and return to the menu item
selection screen.
z Press the [
] button to return to the
screen displayed before you pressed the
[ ] button in step 1.
To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
165).
Available menu items vary depending on the selected shooting or
playback mode (
=
199 –
=
208).
Using the Menu Screen
Congure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows.
1
Access the menu screen.
z Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a tab.
z Tabs represent functions (1), such as
shooting ([
]), playback ([ ]), or
settings ([ ]), or pages within each
function (2). Tabs are identied in this
manual by combining the function and
page, as in [ 1].
z Move the zoom lever to choose the
function tab, and then press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
the page tab.
32
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
On-Screen Keyboard
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (
=
45),
Wi-Fi connections (
=
133), and so on. Note that the length and type of
information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using.
Entering Characters
z Touch the characters to enter them.
z The amount of information you can enter
(1) varies depending on the function you
are using.
Moving the Cursor
z Touch [ ][ ].
Entering Line Breaks
z Touch [ ].
Switching Input Modes
z To switch to numbers or symbols, touch
[ ].
z Touch [
] to enter capital letters.
z Available input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
Deleting Characters
z To delete the previous character, either
touch [ ] or press the [ ] button.
z Touching and holding [
] will delete ve
characters at a time.
(
1
)
Touch-Screen Operations
To choose tabs, press the [ ] button to access the menu screen,
and then touch the desired function tab and page tab.
Drag the menu items up or down to scroll them, or touch a menu item
to choose it.
Touch an option to complete the setting and return to the menu item
selection screen.
For menu items displayed with a bar to indicate the level, touch the
desired position on the bar.
To congure menu items for which options are not shown, rst touch
the menu item to access the setting screen. On the setting screen,
either drag or touch to choose the item, and then touch to choose the
option. To return to the previous screen, touch [
].
You can also touch input elements (such as check boxes or text elds)
to select them, and you can enter text by touching the on-screen
keyboard.
When [
] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the
[ ] button, if you prefer.
When [
] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the
[ ] button, if you prefer.
When [
] is shown, you can touch [ ] instead of pressing the
[ ] button, if you prefer.
To dismiss the menu, press the [
] button again.
33
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Indicator Display
The indicator on the back of the camera (
=
4) lights up or blinks
depending on the camera status.
Color
Indicator
Status
Camera Status
Green Blinking
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting
images, shooting long exposures (
=
96,
=
97), connected to a computer (
=
177),
connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi, or display off
(
=
27,
=
161,
=
162)
Orange On Charging via USB
When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which
may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
Conrming Input and Returning to the
Previous Screen
z Press the [ ] button.
The on-screen keyboard is not available while the viewnder
(
=
28) is in use.
For some functions, [
] is not displayed and cannot be used.
Another way to use the keyboard is by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [
] dial to select characters or icons, and
then pressing the [
] button. You can also move the cursor by
turning the [
] dial. To return to the previous screen, press the
[
] button.
34
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Clock
You can check the current time.
z Press and hold the [
] button.
z The current time appears.
z If you hold the camera vertically while
using the clock function, it will switch to
vertical display.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to change the display color.
z Press the [
] button again to cancel the
clock display.
When the camera is off, press and hold the [ ] button, then
press the ON/OFF button to display the clock.
35
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Still Images
Movies
1
Turn the camera on.
z Press the ON/OFF button.
z The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
z Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in
the upper left of the screen (
=
39,
=
40).
z Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control
over shooting
36
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
2) Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way down.
z As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the ash, it res
automatically.
z Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
z After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
z
Press the movie button. The camera beeps
once as recording begins, and [ Rec] is
displayed with the elapsed time (1).
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
z Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
z Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
2) Resize the subject and recompose
the shot as needed.
z To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
blue will look grainy.
z When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
(
1
)
3
Compose the shot.
z To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom
bar (1) showing the zoom position is
displayed, along with the range of focus
(2).)
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
frames are displayed to indicate image
areas in focus.
z Several frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
z If [Raise the ash] is displayed, lift the
ash with your ngers. It will re when
shooting. If you prefer not to use the
ash, push it down with your nger, into
the camera.
(
1
)
(
2
)
37
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Shoot.
z Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
=
35) to shoot a still image.
z The camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [
] mode, or
operating the camera in other ways.
Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded
in digest movies.
Digest movie image quality is automatically set to [ ] for
NTSC or [
] for PAL and cannot be changed (
=
160).
Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
or trigger the self-timer (
=
164).
Digest movies are saved as separate movie les in the following
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [
] mode.
- The digest movie le size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the
total recording time reaches approximately 16 minutes and 40
seconds.
- The digest movie is protected (
=
115).
- Daylight saving time (
=
20) or time zone (
=
162) settings
are changed.
- A new folder is created (
=
159).
Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modied or erased.
If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
the setting in advance. Choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 7] tab ►
[Digest Type] ► [No Stills].
Individual chapters can be edited (
=
128).
3) Finish recording.
z Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
z Recording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
The ash ring during shots indicates that the camera has
automatically attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main
subject and background (Multi-area White Balance).
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
=
35) and choose [ ].
2
Compose the shot.
z Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
Auto)” (
=
35) to compose the shot and
focus.
z For more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
38
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
You can change how long images are displayed after shots
(
=
56).
Movies
Before movie recording, lower the ash with your nger. During
recording, keep your ngers away from the microphone (1).
Leaving the ash raised, or blocking the microphone may prevent
audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound
mufed.
Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
recording movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant
camera shake. To record subjects at the same size shown before
recording, follow the steps in “Recording Movies with Subjects at
the Same Size Shown before Shooting” (
=
55).
(
1
)
Audio is recorded in stereo.
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created
on the same day, or specify the date of the digest movie to play (
=
109).
Still Images/Movies
If the camera makes no operating sounds, it may have been
turned on while holding down the [
] button. To activate
sounds, press the [
] button, choose [Mute] on the [ 3]
tab, and then choose [Off].
Still Images
A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
If your shots are dark despite the ash ring, move closer to the
subject. For details on the ash range, see “Camera” (
=
210).
The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the
range of focus (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (
=
211).
To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit
when shooting in low-light conditions.
A blinking [
] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
indicates that shooting is not possible until the ash has nished
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the ash is ready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or
release it and press it again.
No shutter sound is played when “Sleeping” and “Sleeping
Babies” icons (
=
39) are displayed.
Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
39
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue,
and the background color of [ ] is orange.
For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range
Subjects icons are displayed.
In [
] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face,
Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects.
For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects:
moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies;
moving children; and other moving subjects.
Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving
children in drive modes other than [
] (
=
40,
=
44) and when
[Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to [On] and scenes are automatically corrected
(
=
51).
Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people
when the ash is set to [
].
Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving
children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of
registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years
old) are detected (
=
46). Conrm beforehand that the date and time
are correct (
=
20).
Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
77) if the scene icon does not
match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot
with your expected effect, color, or brightness.
Scene Icons
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (
=
40).
Subject
Background
Normal Backlit Dark*
1
Sunsets Spotlights
People
*
2
*
3
Moving People
*
3
*
3
Shadows on Face
*
2
Smiling
*
3
*
3
Sleeping
*
2
*
3
Babies
*
3
*
3
Smiling Babies
*
3
*
3
Sleeping Babies
*
2
*
3
Moving Children
*
3
*
3
Other Subjects
*
2
*
3
Other Moving Subjects
*
3
*
3
Other Close-Range
Subjects
*
2
*
3
*1 Tripod used.
*2 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
*3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
40
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Image Stabilization Icons
Still Images
Movies
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions (Intelligent IS) is
automatically applied, and the following icons are displayed.
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*
Image stabilization for angular camera shake and shift-shake in
macro shots (Hybrid IS).
For movies, [ ] is displayed and [ ] image stabilization is also
applied.
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as
when recording while walking (Dynamic)
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when
recording movies at telephoto (Powered)
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to counteract
wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you
follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical
camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow
subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera
shake.
To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (
=
54). In
this case, an IS icon is not displayed.
In [
] mode, no [ ] icon is displayed.
Continuous Shooting Scenes
If the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is
displayed when you shoot a still image, the camera shoots continuously. If
the icon for one of the following scenes (in table’s left column) is displayed
when you press the shutter button halfway, one of the icons [ ], [ ], or
[ ] is displayed to inform you that the camera shoots continuously.
Smiling
(including Babies)
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
Sleeping
(including Babies)
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
The AF-assist beam and the ash will not re, and
the shutter sound will not be played.
Children
So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the rst
shot.
When you want to shoot single images only, press the [ ] button,
and then select [
] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[
] dial).
41
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Common, Convenient Features
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 17x enlargement.
1
Move the zoom lever toward [ ].
z Hold the lever until zooming stops.
z Zooming stops at the largest zoom factor
before the image becomes noticeably
grainy, which is then indicated on the
screen.
2
Move the zoom lever toward [ ]
again.
z The camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
z (1) is the current zoom factor.
Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The zoom bar is color-coded to indicate the
zoom range.
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not
appear grainy.
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear
grainy.
Because the blue range will not be available at some recording
pixel settings (
=
94), the maximum zoom factor can be
achieved by following step 1.
(
1
)
On-Screen Frames
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.
A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the camera
detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the
screen.
When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
77) if no frames are displayed, if
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
To choose subjects to focus on, touch the desired subject on the
screen. [
] is displayed, and the camera enters Touch AF mode
(
=
90). Pressing the shutter button halfway will display a blue
frame, and the camera will keep the subject in focus and image
brightness adjusted (Servo AF).
42
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Using the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
30).
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
z For Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
z For Movies: Press the movie button.
z Once you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a self-
timer sound.
z Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the ash res.)
z To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
z To restore the original setting, choose [
]
in step 1.
To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 3] tab
► [Digital Zoom] ► [Off].
Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths (Step Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot at common focal lengths in a range of 24 – 100 mm (35mm lm
equivalent).
z To change the focal length from 24 to
28 mm, turn the [
] ring counterclockwise
until it clicks. Turn the [ ] ring
counterclockwise to zoom in or clockwise
to zoom out.
Step zoom is not available when recording movies even if you
turn the [
] ring.
When you are using digital zoom (
=
41), you cannot adjust the
zoom factor by turning the [
] ring counterclockwise. However,
you can set the focal length to 100 mm by turning it clockwise.
43
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
For movies recorded using the self-timer, recording begins after
your specied delay time, but specifying the number of shots has
no effect.
When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white
balance are determined by the rst shot. More time is required
between shots when the ash res or when you have specied
to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the
memory card becomes full.
When a delay longer than two seconds is specied, two seconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the ash res.)
Shooting by Touching the Screen
(Touch Shutter)
Still Images
Movies
With this option, instead of pressing the shutter button, you can simply
touch the screen and release your nger to shoot. The camera will focus
on subjects and adjust image brightness automatically.
1
Enable the touch-shutter function.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Touch
Shutter] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose [Enable] (
=
31).
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
z Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
42) and choose [ ].
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
Customizing the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
1
Choose [ ].
z Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
42), choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
delay time or number of shots.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a value, and then press the
[ ] button twice.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
z Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
42) to shoot.
44
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
During continuous shooting, the focus, exposure, and colors are
locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the
shutter button halfway.
Cannot be used with the self-timer (
=
42).
Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
Shooting may slow down if the ash res.
Multi-area White Balance (
=
35) is not available. Also note that
these features are not available.
- [Hg Lamp Corr.] (
=
51)
- [Blink Detection] (
=
53)
With Touch Shutter (
=
43), the camera shoots continuously
while you touch the screen. Focus and exposure during
continuous shooting remain constant, after they are determined
for the rst shot.
In [ ] mode, you can also choose items in step 1 by
pressing the [
][ ] buttons.
Image Display during Playback
Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group,
and only the rst image in that group will be displayed. To indicate that
the image is part of a group, [
] is displayed in the upper left of the
screen.
If you erase a grouped image (
=
118), all images in the group
are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
2
Shoot.
z Touch the subject on the screen, and
then lift your nger immediately.
z The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
z To cancel touch shutter, choose [Disable]
in step 1.
Even while the shot is displayed, you can prepare for the next
shot by touching [
].
Continuous Shooting
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Camera” (
=
210).
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
z Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
45
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Using Face ID
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will detect that person’s
face, and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for that person when
shooting. In [ ] mode, the camera can detect babies and children
based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when
shooting.
This function also enables you to nd shots you have taken that include
registered people (
=
110).
Personal Information
Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with
Face ID, and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved
on the camera. Additionally, when registered people are detected,
their names will be recorded in still images. When using the Face ID
function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others,
and when posting images online where many others can view them.
When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces,
names, and birthdays) from the camera (
=
49).
Grouped images can be played back individually (
=
112) and
ungrouped (
=
112).
Protecting (
=
115) a grouped image will protect all images in
the group.
Grouped images can be viewed individually when played
back using Image Search (
=
109). In this case, images are
temporarily ungrouped.
The following actions are not available for grouped images:
editing Face ID information (
=
113), magnifying (
=
114),
tagging as favorites (
=
121), editing (
=
123), printing
(
=
178), setting up individual image printing (
=
182), or
adding to a photobook (
=
184). To do these things, either
view grouped images individually (
=
112) or cancel grouping
(
=
112) rst.
46
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
z After [Register?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The [Edit Prole] screen is displayed.
3
Register the person’s name and
birthday.
z Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
(
=
32).
z To register a birthday, on the [Edit Prole]
screen, choose [Birthday] (either press
the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the date.
z When nished, press the [
] button.
4
Save the settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Save], and then press the
[ ] button.
z After a message is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [ ]
button.
Registering Face ID Information
You can register information (face info, names, and birthdays) for up to 12
people to use with Face ID.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
31).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add to Registry], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a New Face], and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Register face information.
z Aim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
z A white frame on the person’s face
indicates that the face is recognized.
Make sure a white frame is displayed on
the face, and then shoot.
z If the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
47
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured
image or scene differs drastically from the registered face
information.
If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected, overwrite
registered information with new face info. Registering face info right
before shooting will allow for easier detection of registered faces.
If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you
continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the
image during playback (
=
113).
Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they
grow, you should update their face info regularly (
=
46).
Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the
[Shooting Info] check box in “Customizing the Information
Displayed” (
=
101) so that the names are not displayed.
If you don’t want names to be recorded in images, choose [Face ID
Settings] on the [
2] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose [Off].
You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen
(simple information display) (
=
107).
In [
] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen,
but they will be recorded in still images.
Names recorded in continuous shooting (
=
44) continue to be
recorded in the same position as the rst shot, even if subjects
move.
5
Continue registering face
information.
z To register up to 4 more points of face
information (expressions or angles),
repeat step 2.
z Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot when
smiling, and shots inside and outside.
The ash will not re when following step 2.
If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons
(
=
39) will not be displayed in [ ] mode.
You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if
you have not lled all 5 face info slots (
=
46).
Shooting
If you register a person ahead of time, the camera will prioritize that
person as the main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for
that person when shooting.
z
When you point the camera toward people,
the names of up to 3 registered people will
be displayed when they are detected.
z Shoot.
z Displayed names will be recorded in still
images. The names of detected people
(maximum total of 5) will be recorded,
even if the names are not displayed.
People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected
as the registered person if they share similar facial features.
48
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Even if you change names in [Edit Prole], the names recorded in
previously shot images will remain the same.
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as
their faces change quickly as they grow.
You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been
lled.
1
Access the [Add Face Info] screen.
z Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
46), choose [Add Face
Info].
2
Choose a person to overwrite their
face info.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of the person whose face info
you want to overwrite, and then press the
[ ] button.
z If ve items of face info have already
been registered, a message will be
displayed. Choose [OK] (either press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
z If less than ve items of face info are
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
Checking and Editing Registered Information
1
Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.
z Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
46), choose [Check/
Edit Info].
2
Choose a person to check or edit
their information.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the person whose information you want
to check or edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Check or edit the information as
needed.
z To check a name or birthday, choose [Edit
Prole] (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button. On the screen displayed,
you can edit the name or birthday as
described in step 3 of “Registering Face
ID Information” (
=
46).
z To check face information, choose [Face
Info List] (either press the [
][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button. To erase face information,
press the [ ] button on the screen
displayed, choose face information to
erase by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons or turning the [ ] dial, and then
press the [ ] button. After [Erase?] is
displayed, choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
49
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Erasing Registered Information
You can erase information (face info, names, and birthdays) registered to
Face ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be
erased.
1
Access the [Erase Info] screen.
z Follow step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
46) and choose [Erase
Info].
2
Choose a person to erase their
information.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of the person to erase, and
then press the [ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
display their name (
=
109), overwrite their info (
=
113), or
search for images that include them (
=
110).
You can also erase names in image information (
=
113).
3
Choose the face info to overwrite.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the face info to
overwrite, and then press the [ ] button.
4
Register face information.
z Follow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
46) to shoot, and then
register the new face information.
z Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information. In addition to a head-on
angle, add a slight side angle, a shot
when smiling, and shots inside and
outside.
You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are lled.
Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.
You can follow the above steps to register new face info when
there is at least one slot open; however, you cannot overwrite
any face information. Instead of overwriting face info, rst erase
unwanted existing info (
=
49), and then register new face
information (
=
46) as needed.
50
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Changing Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
Choose from 4 levels of image quality. For guidelines on how many of
each kind of image can t on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per
Memory Card” (
=
212).
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Guidelines for choosing image quality based on paper size
(for 3:2 images)
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
For e-mailing and similar purposes
Not available in [ ] mode.
You can also change the image quality by accessing MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 1] tab ► [Image quality].
Image Customization Features
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Still Images
Movies
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z Once the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Same aspect ratio as
35mm lm, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard sizes.
Used for display on standard-denition televisions or similar display
devices. Also used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series
sizes.
Square aspect ratio.
Not available in [ ] mode.
You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (
=
31)
► [
1] tab ► [Still Image Aspect Ratio].
51
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Changing Movie Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
Adjust movie image quality (image size and frame rate). The frame rate
indicates how many frames are recorded per second, which is determined
automatically based on the NTSC or PAL setting (
=
160). For guidelines
on the total recording time for movies at each level of image quality
that will t on a memory card, see “Recording Time per Memory Card”
(
=
212).
z Press the [
] button, choose the movie
quality menu item, and then choose the
desired option (
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
For NTSC Video
Image
Quality
Number of Recording
Pixels
Frame Rate Details
1920 x 1080 59.94 fps
For shooting in Full
HD. [
] enables
movies with smoother
motion.
1920 x 1080 29.97 fps
1920 x 1080 23.98 fps
1280 x 720 29.97 fps For shooting in HD.
640 x 480 29.97 fps
For shooting in
standard denition.
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from
Mercury Lamps
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes
illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This
greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multi-
area White Balance.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Hg
Lamp Corr.] on the [ 6] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
31).
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
After you are nished shooting under mercury lamps, you should
set [Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not
caused by mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.
Try taking some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
In continuous shooting (
=
44), this setting is set to [Off] and
cannot be changed.
52
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Helpful Shooting Features
Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level
Still Images
Movies
An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera
is level from front to back and left to right.
1
Display the electronic level.
z Press the [ ] button several times to
display the electronic level.
2
Straighten the camera.
z (1) indicates the front-back orientation
and (2) the left-right orientation.
z If the camera is tilted, move it so that the
red line changes to green.
If the electronic level is not displayed in step 1, press the
[
] button and check the setting in [ 1] tab ► [Shooting
information display].
The electronic level is not displayed during movie recording.
If you hold the camera vertically, the orientation of the electronic
level will be updated automatically to match the camera
orientation.
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you
level the camera (
=
161).
Not available in [
] mode.
(
1
) (
2
)
For PAL Video
Image
Quality
Number of Recording
Pixels
Frame Rate Details
1920 x 1080 50.00 fps
For shooting in Full
HD.
1920 x 1080 25.00 fps
1280 x 720 25.00 fps For shooting in HD.
640 x 480 25.00 fps
For shooting in
standard denition.
Black bars (displayed on the left and right in [ ] and
[
] modes and on the top and bottom in [ ],
[
], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and
[
] modes) indicate image areas not recorded.
You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (
=
31)
► [
8] tab ► [Movie Quality].
53
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Checking for Closed Eyes
Still Images
Movies
[ ] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed
their eyes.
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Blink
Detection] on the [ 7] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
31).
2
Shoot.
z [ ] ashes when the camera detects a
person whose eyes are closed.
z To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
When you have specied multiple shots in [ ] mode, this
function is only available for the nal shot.
A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when
you have selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display
Time] (
=
56).
This feature is not available during continuous shooting in [
]
mode (
=
40).
This feature is not available in continuous shooting mode
(
=
44).
Magnifying the Area in Focus
Still Images
Movies
You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will
enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame.
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [AF-
Point Zoom] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
31).
2
Check the focus.
z Press the shutter button halfway. The
face detected as the main subject is now
magnied.
z To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
The area in focus is not magnied in the following cases when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
- If a face was not detected, if the person is too close to the
camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the
camera detects subject movement
- When digital zoom is used (
=
41)
- When a TV is used as a display (
=
170)
Not available in [
] mode.
54
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Deactivating Image Stabilization
Still Images
Movies
When the camera is held still (as when shooting from a tripod), you should
set image stabilization to [Off] to deactivate it.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [IS Mode], press the
[ ] button, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
desired option (
=
31).
Continuous
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is
automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (
=
40).
Off Deactivates image stabilization.
Deactivating Auto Level
Still Images
Movies
Normally, auto leveling keeps movies straight. To cancel this feature,
choose [Disable].
z Press the [
] button, choose
[ Auto level] on the [ 4] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
31).
z Choose [Disable], and press the [
]
button again (
=
31).
Once recording begins, the display area narrows, and subjects
are enlarged (
=
55).
55
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Customizing Camera Operation
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as
follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen”
(
=
31).
Preventing the AF-Assist Beam from Firing
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus
when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions.
z Press the [
] button, choose [AF-
assist Beam] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose [Off].
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same
Size Shown before Shooting
Still Images
Movies
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for image straightening and correction
of signicant camera shake.
To record movies with subjects at the same size shown before shooting,
you can reduce image stabilization and cancel Auto Level.
z Set [
Auto level] to [Disable] as
described in “Deactivating Auto Level”
(
=
54).
z Follow step 1 in “Deactivating Image
Stabilization” (
=
54) to access the [IS
Settings] screen.
z Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
[Low] (
=
31).
You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
[Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off]
(
=
54).
Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [
]
(NTSC) or [
] (PAL).
56
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
Still Images
Movies
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is
displayed immediately after shooting.
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
1
Access the [Review image after
shooting] screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Review image after shooting] on the
[ 2] tab, and then press the [ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Display Time], and then choose
the desired option.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Quick].
Quick Displays images only until you can shoot again.
2 sec., 4 sec.,
8 sec.
Displays images for the specied time. Even while
the shot is displayed, you can take another shot by
pressing the shutter button halfway again.
Hold
Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
Off No image display after shots.
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from
Lighting Up
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce
red-eye when the ash is used in low-light shots.
1
Access the [Flash Control] screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then
choose [Off].
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
57
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.
1
Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],
[4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] (=
56).
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Display Info], and then choose
the desired option.
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Off Displays only the image.
Detailed
Displays shooting details (
=
192).
When [Display Time] (
=
56) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display
Info] is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.
By pressing the [
] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the
settings of [Display Info] are not changed. You can also erase
images by pressing the [
] button.
58
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Applying Effects Automatically
(Creative Shot)
Still Images Movies
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot
The camera determines the subject and shooting conditions, automatically
applying special effects and recomposing the shot to emphasize the
subject. Six still images are recorded for each shot. You can capture
multiple still images with effects using camera-determined settings.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down. As you shoot, the shutter sound is
played three times.
z After the six images are displayed
in succession, they are displayed
simultaneously for about two seconds.
z To keep the images displayed until you
press the shutter button halfway, press
the [
] button. You can choose an image
for full-screen display by pressing the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ]
dial, and then press the [ ] button.
z To return to the original display, press the
[
] button.
Shooting will take some time when the ash res, but hold the
camera steady until the shutter sound is played three times.
The six images are managed together as a group (
=
112).
Simultaneous display of the six images as shown in step 2 is only
available immediately after you shoot.
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and
take shots enhanced with unique image effects or
captured using special functions
59
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Recording Movies with a Variety of Effects
Let the camera determine subjects and shooting conditions when you
record movies, and lters and effects such as playback in slow or fast
motion will be added automatically. Once you have recorded a few
movies, up to four are automatically combined to create a Creative Shot
movie of 15 – 25 seconds. Note that sound is not recorded in this mode.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Record the rst movie.
z Press the movie button. Recording
begins, and a bar is displayed to indicate
the elapsed time.
z Recording stops automatically in 3 – 6
seconds.
3
Record the second to fourth movies.
z Repeat step 2 three times to record four
movies.
Even if you do not record four movies that day, a Creative Shot
movie will be saved as a separate le once the date changes.
Effects are generally applied consistently to movies 1 – 4, but you
can also change the effect in each movie (
=
59).
Individual chapters can be edited (
=
128).
Creative Shot Movie Playback
You can choose and play back Creative Shot movies recorded in [ ]
mode (
=
108).
Choosing Effects
You can choose effects for images captured in [ ] mode.
z After choosing [
] mode, turn the [ ]
ring to choose the effect.
Auto
All effects
Retro
Images resemble old photos
Monochrome
Images are generated in one color
Special
Bold, distinctive-looking images
Natural
Subdued, natural-looking images
60
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
Still Images
Movies
z Vivid shots of reworks.
Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
In [
] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed
(
=
79) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
Because the camera will shoot continuously in [
] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
In [
] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
In [
] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. In this case,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] (
=
54).
When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ ]
mode instead of [
] mode will give better results (
=
35).
You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 1] tab ► [Rec. Mode].
In [
] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
Specic Scenes
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically congure the settings for optimal shots.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Choose a shooting mode.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose a shooting mode
(
=
30).
3
Shoot.
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
z Take shots of people with a softening
effect.
Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld Night Scene)
Still Images
Movies
z Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
z A single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
61
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting Yourself under Optimal Settings
(Self Portrait)
For self-portraits, customizable image processing includes skin smoothing
as well as brightness and background adjustment to make yourself stand
out.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
60) and choose [ ].
2
Open the screen.
z Open the screen as shown.
3
Congure the setting.
z On the screen, touch the icon of the
setting to congure.
z Choose the desired option.
z To return to the previous screen, touch
[
].
4
Shoot.
(
2
)
(
1
)
Applying Special Effects
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
Shooting in Vivid Colors
(Super Vivid)
Still Images
Movies
z Shots in rich, vivid colors.
Posterized Shots (Poster Effect)
Still Images
Movies
z Shots that resemble an old poster or
illustration.
In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots rst, to make
sure you obtain the desired results.
You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 1] tab ► [Rec. Mode].
62
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting High-Contrast Scenes
(High Dynamic Range)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels
each time you shoot, and the camera combines image areas with optimal
brightness to create a single image. This mode can reduce the washed-
out highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tend to occur in high-
contrast shots.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
60) and choose [ ].
2
Shoot.
z Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
When you press the shutter button all
the way down, the camera will take three
shots and combine them.
Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
If excessive camera shake interferes with shooting, mount
the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod
or other means to secure the camera (
=
54).
Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry.
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes and combines the images.
[
] may be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway
in bright conditions, indicating automatic adjustment for optimal
image brightness.
Item Details
Choose from [ ] or one of six levels of background
defocusing.
Choose from ve levels of brightness.
Choose from ve levels of skin smoothing. Skin smoothing
is optimized for the main subject’s face.
To use touch shutter, choose [ ].
Areas other than people’s skin may be modied, depending on
the shooting conditions.
Try taking some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
In [ ] ash mode, background defocusing is set to [ ] and
cannot be changed.
In [
] mode, the time left before shooting is shown on the top of
the screen when you activate the self-timer by selecting [
], or
by selecting [
] and setting the time to 3 seconds or more.
63
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Colors will look faded on the shooting screen, but the image aging
effect is not shown. Review the image in Playback mode to see
the effect (
=
105).
The image aging effect is not shown in movies.
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot with the distorting effect of a sh-eye lens.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
60) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Adding Artistic Effects
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
60) and choose [ ].
z Turn the [
] ring to choose an effect.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
Natural Images are natural and organic.
Art Standard Images resemble paintings, with subdued contrast.
Art Vivid Images resemble vivid illustrations.
Art Bold Images resemble oil paintings, with bold edges.
Art Embossed
Images resemble old photos, with bold edges and
dark ambiance.
Shooting with Faded Colors (Nostalgic)
Still Images
Movies
This effect makes colors look faded and images look weathered, as in old
photographs. Choose from ve effect levels.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
60) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
64
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Speed Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
Movies are played back at 30 fps.
The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set
the zoom before shooting.
Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ][ ]
buttons in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation,
press the [
][ ] buttons.
To move the frame when it is in horizontal orientation, press the
[
][ ] buttons, and to move the frame when it is in vertical
orientation, press the [
][ ] buttons.
Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
Movie image quality is [
] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [ ] at
an aspect ratio of [
] (
=
50). These quality settings cannot
be changed.
You can also move the frame by touching or dragging across the
screen.
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above
and below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
60) and choose [ ].
z A white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
2
Choose the area to keep in focus.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and turn the [
] dial to move it.
3
For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose the speed.
4
Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
z Press the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
65
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Making Subjects Stand Out
(Background Defocus)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot subjects so that they stand out from the background.
Two consecutive images are captured with settings optimized for
background defocus. The background is defocused through lens effects
and subject- and scene-based image processing.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
60) and choose [ ].
2
Shoot.
z Hold the camera steady as you shoot.
Two consecutive images are captured
when you press the shutter button all the
way down.
z A blinking [
] icon indicates that the
images could not be processed.
Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent
you from obtaining the desired results.
For the best results with background defocusing, try shooting
close to the subject, and ensure ample distance between the
subject and background.
There may be a delay after shooting before you can shoot again.
To adjust the effect level, turn the [
] ring.
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
Still Images
Movies
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
60) and choose [ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose a color tone.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
66
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting in Monochrome
Still Images
Movies
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
60) and choose [ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose a color tone.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
B/W Black and white shots.
Sepia Sepia tone shots.
Blue Blue and white shots.
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
Still Images
Movies
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus lter were
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
60) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose an effect
level.
z A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
67
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
4
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button. The ash res
as the camera takes the rst shot.
z The second and third shots are now
taken, without ring the ash.
5
Have the person stay still until the
lamp blinks.
z The person you are shooting should stay
still until the lamp blinks three times after
the third shot, which may take up to about
two seconds.
z All the shots are combined to create a
single image.
Under some shooting conditions, images may not look as
expected.
For better shots, have the person stand away from illumination
such as street lights, and make sure the ash is raised.
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
To avoid blurry shots, make sure the person you shoot in
steps 4 – 5 stays still.
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Shooting Starry Skies (Star)
Shooting People against Starry Skies (Star Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
Capture beautiful shots of people against starry skies. After initially ring
the ash to capture the person, the camera shoots twice without ash.
The three images are combined into a single image and processed to
make the stars more prominent.
For details on the ash range, see “Camera” (
=
210).
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
60) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Raise the ash.
z Lift the ash with your ngers.
3
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
68
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies
(Star Nightscape)
Still Images
Movies
Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes. Starlight in
the image is automatically enhanced, making starry skies look beautiful.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
60) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still and
prevent camera shake.
3
Shoot.
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night
Display] ► [On] (
=
161) before shooting.
To adjust subject brightness, try changing the ash exposure
compensation (
=
92).
To adjust background brightness, try changing the exposure
compensation (
=
78). However, images may not look as
expected under some shooting conditions, and the person should
stay still in steps 4 – 5, which may take up to about 15 seconds.
To capture more stars and brighter starlight, choose MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 6] tab ► [Star Portrait Settings] ► [Star Visibility]
► [Prominent]. However, images may not look as expected under
some shooting conditions, and the person should stay still in
steps 4 – 5, which may take up to about 8 seconds.
To make stars brighter, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 6] tab ►
[Star Emphasis] ► [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a
starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce
eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing
dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off].
69
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
3
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
4
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button all the way
down. [Busy] is displayed briey, and
then shooting begins.
z Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
z To cancel shooting, press the shutter
button all the way down again. Note
that cancellation may take up to about
30 seconds.
If the camera runs out of battery power, shooting stops and a
composite image created from the images up to that point is
saved.
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night
Display] ► [On] (
=
161) before shooting.
Try switching to manual focus mode (
=
85) to more accurately
specify the focal position before shooting.
For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [ 2] tab ► [Night
Display] ► [On] (
=
161) before shooting.
To make stars brighter, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 5] tab ►
[Star Emphasis] ► [Sharp]. To emphasize the bright stars in a
starry sky, set [Star Emphasis] to [Soft]. This setting can produce
eye-catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de-emphasizing
dimmer stars. To disable starlight processing, select [Off].
Try switching to manual focus mode (
=
85) to more accurately
specify the focal position before shooting.
Shooting Star Trails (Star Trails)
Still Images
Movies
Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in
a single image. After determining the shutter speed and number of shots,
the camera shoots continuously. A shooting session can last up to about
two hours. Check the battery level in advance.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
60) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Specify the duration of the shooting
session.
z Turn the [ ] ring to choose the shooting
duration.
70
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
4
Check the brightness.
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot a single still image.
z Switch to Playback mode (
=
105) and
check image brightness.
z To adjust brightness, turn the exposure
compensation dial and change the
exposure level on the shooting screen.
Check brightness again by taking another
shot.
5
Shoot.
z Press the movie button. [Busy] is
displayed briey, and then shooting
begins.
z Do not disturb the camera while shooting.
z To cancel shooting, press the movie
button again. Note that cancellation may
take up to about 30 seconds.
z The camera operates in Eco mode
(
=
161) while shooting.
Item Options Details
Effect
Choose movie effects,
such as star trails.
Shot Interval
15 sec., 30 sec.,
1 min.
Choose the interval
between each shot.
Frame Rate
, (NTSC)
, (PAL)
Choose the movie frame
rate.
Shooting Time
60 min., 90 min.,
120 min., Unlimited
Choose the length of
the recording session.
To record until the
battery runs out, choose
[Unlimited].
Shooting Movies of Star Movement
(Star Time-Lapse Movie)
Still Images
Movies
By recording a time-lapse movie that combines images shot at a specied
interval, you can create movies with fast-moving stars. You can adjust the
shooting interval and recording duration as needed.
Note that each session takes a long time, and requires many shots. Check
the battery level and memory card space in advance.
1
Choose [ ].
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
60) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and
cannot be adjusted.
2
Congure movie settings.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then choose
the desired option.
3
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
71
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Sound is not recorded.
For easier viewing, try choosing MENU ► [
2] tab ► [Night
Display] ► [On] (
=
161) before shooting.
You can also access the screen in step 2 by choosing MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 5] tab ► [Star Time-Lapse Movie Setting].
To save each shot collected before the movie is created, choose
MENU (
=
31) ► [ 5] tab ► [Save Stills] ► [On]. Note
that these individual images are managed as a single group, and
during playback, only the rst image is displayed. To indicate that
the image is part of a group, [
] is displayed in the upper left
of the screen. If you erase a grouped image (
=
118), all images
in the group are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
Try switching to manual focus mode (
=
85) to more accurately
specify the focal position before shooting.
Even if you specify [Unlimited] in [Shooting Time] in step 2 and
use an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
=
169), shooting will
stop after about 8 hours, at most.
Estimated playback time based on shooting interval and frame rate (for a
one-hour session)
Interval between Shots
Frame Rate
Playback Time
NTSC PAL
15 sec.
16 sec.
15 sec.
8 sec.
30 sec.
8 sec.
30 sec.
4 sec.
1 min.
4 sec.
1 min.
2 sec.
There will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera
processes the images.
If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space,
shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that
point is saved.
A shooting interval of [1 min.] is not available with these effects:
[
], [ ], [ ], or [ ].
72
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Adjusting the Focus
Still Images
Movies
Automatically adjust the focus to suit starry skies.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
z Choose [ ] (
=
68), [ ] (
=
69), or
[ ] (
=
70).
2
Secure the camera.
z Mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to keep it still.
3
Frame the stars to capture.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Tilt the camera so that the stars to
capture are inside the frame displayed.
4
Adjust the focus.
z Press the [ ] button. [Adjusting star
focus] is displayed, and adjustment
begins.
z Adjustment may take about 30
seconds. Do not move the camera until
[Adjustment completed] is displayed.
z Press the [
] button.
5
Shoot (=
68, =
69, =
70).
Adjusting Colors
Still Images
Movies
Colors can be manually adjusted in [ ] mode.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
z Choose [ ] (
=
67), [ ] (
=
68),
[ ] (
=
69), or [ ] (
=
70).
2
Choose color adjustment.
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
30).
3
Adjust the setting.
z Turn the [ ] dial or press the [ ][ ]
buttons to adjust the correction level for B
and A, and then press the [ ] button.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
B represents blue and A, amber.
Skin tones remain the same when you adjust colors in [
] mode.
Advanced settings can be accessed by pressing the [
]
button when the screen in step 2 is displayed (
=
82).
You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 2.
73
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Recording Various Movies
Recording Movies in [ ] Mode
Still Images
Movies
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
30).
z Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
2
Congure the settings to suit the
movie (=
193).
3
Shoot.
z Press the movie button.
z To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
You can also choose the shooting mode by accessing MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 1] tab ► [Rec. Mode].
Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [ ] and
pressing the [
][ ] buttons while [ ] is displayed.
The focus may not be adjusted under the following conditions. In
this case, try again from step 3.
- There is a bright light source
- Airplanes or other light sources or clouds crossed the sky
If adjustment fails, focus returns to the original position.
74
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter
Still Images
Movies
Auto Slow Shutter can be disabled if movement in movies is rough.
However, under low light, movies may look dark.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[ Auto slow shutter] on the [ 7]
tab, and then choose [A-SLOW OFF]
(
=
31).
z To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [A-SLOW ON].
Auto Slow Shutter is only available for [ ] and [ ]
movies.
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Recording
Still Images
Movies
You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in 1/3-
stop increments within a range of −3 to +3 stops.
1
Lock the exposure.
z Touch [ ] to lock the exposure.
z To unlock the exposure, touch [
] again.
2
Adjust the exposure.
z Turn the exposure compensation dial.
3
Shoot (=
73).
75
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Using the Attenuator
The attenuator can reduce audio distortion in noisy environments.
However, in quiet environments, it lowers the sound-recording level.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Attenuator] on the [ 7] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
31).
z Choose an option as desired (
=
31).
Recording Short Clips
Still Images
Movies
Apply playback effects to brief clips of a few seconds, such as fast motion,
slow motion, or replay. Clips recorded in this mode may be included in
Story Highlights albums (
=
129).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
30).
z Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
2
Specify the shooting time and
playback effect.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Turn the [
] dial to set the shooting time
(4 – 6 sec.), and turn the [ ] dial to set
the playback effect (
=
76).
3
Shoot (=
73).
z A bar showing the elapsed time is
displayed.
Correcting Severe Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
Counteract severe camera shake, such as when recording while moving.
The portion of images displayed changes more than for [Standard], and
subjects are further enlarged.
z Follow the steps in “Recording Movies
with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting” (
=
55) to choose
[High].
[Dynamic IS] is not available when [IS Mode] is set to [Off].
Only [Standard] is available when the movie quality is [
]
(NTSC) or [
] (PAL).
Sound Settings
Still Images
Movies
Deactivating the Wind Filter
Noise caused by strong wind can be reduced. However, the recording
may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind. In
this case, you can deactivate the wind lter.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Wind
Filter] on the [ 7] tab, and then press
[ ] (
=
31).
z Choose [Off] (
=
31).
76
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
Playback Effects
2x
Playback in fast motion
1x
Playback at normal speed
1/2x
Playback in slow motion
Normal playback with the last two seconds rewound and
played again in slow motion
Sound is not recorded in these clips.
The movie quality is [
] (for NTSC) or [ ] (for PAL)
(
=
51,
=
52) and cannot be changed.
During [
] recording, a mark indicating the last two seconds is
added to the bar showing the elapsed time.
Recording iFrame Movies
Still Images
Movies
Record movies that can be edited with iFrame-compatible software or
devices.
1
Choose [ ].
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
30).
z Black bars displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen indicate
image areas not recorded.
2
Shoot (=
73).
iFrame is a video format developed by Apple Inc.
The movie quality is [
] (for NTSC) or [ ] (for PAL)
(
=
51,
=
52) and cannot be changed.
77
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Customize the settings as desired
(=
78 – =
95), and then shoot.
If the optimum exposure cannot be obtained when you press the
shutter button halfway, the shutter speed and aperture value are
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed
(
=
79) or activating the ash (if subjects are dark,
=
91),
which may enable optimum exposure.
Movies can be recorded in [
] mode as well, by pressing the
movie button. However, some
menu (
=
30) and MENU
(
=
31) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie
recording.
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting
style
Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode
dial set to [
] mode.
[
]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes
other than [
], make sure the function is available in that mode
(
=
193).
78
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
AE: Auto Exposure
After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [
] dial
(Program Shift).
Changing the Metering Method
Still Images
Movies
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
Evaluative
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the
shooting conditions.
Center
Weighted
Avg.
Determines the average brightness of light across
the entire image area, calculated by treating
brightness in the central area as more important.
Spot
Metering restricted to within the [
] (Spot AE Point
frame). You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to
the AF frame (
=
79).
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation)
Still Images
Movies
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of -3 to +3.
z As you watch the screen, turn the
exposure compensation dial to adjust
brightness.
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure
(AE Lock)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
1
Lock the exposure.
z Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then press
the [ ] button.
z [
] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
z To unlock AE, press the [
] button again.
[ ] is no longer displayed.
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
79
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing the ISO Speed
Still Images
Movies
Set the ISO speed to [AUTO] for automatic adjustment to suit the shooting
mode and conditions. Otherwise, set a higher ISO speed for higher
sensitivity, or a lower value for lower sensitivity.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
The faster shutter speed used at higher ISO speeds reduces
subject and camera shake and increases the ash range.
However, shots may look grainy.
You can also set the ISO speed by accessing MENU (
=
31) ►
[
5] tab ► [ISO speed] ► [ISO Speed].
Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame
Still Images
Movies
1
Set the metering method to [ ].
z Follow the steps in “Changing the
Metering Method” (
=
78) to choose
[ ].
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Spot
AE Point] on the [ 6] tab, and then
choose [AF Point] (
=
31).
z The Spot AE Point frame will now be
linked to the movement of the AF frame
(
=
88).
Not available when [AF method] is set to [ +Tracking] (
=
88).
80
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB Shooting)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels
(standard exposure, underexposure, and then overexposure) each
time you shoot. You can adjust the amount of underexposure and
overexposure (relative to standard exposure) from –2 to +2 stops in 1/3-
stop increments.
1
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Bracketing] on the [ 4] tab, and then
choose [ ] (
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons
or turning the [ ] dial.
AEB shooting is only available in [ ] mode (
=
91).
Continuous shooting (
=
44) is not available in this mode.
If exposure compensation is already in use (
=
78), the value
specied for that function is treated as the standard exposure
level for this function.
You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing
the [
] button when the exposure compensation screen
(
=
78) is displayed.
Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specied in [
]
(
=
43).
In [Blink Detection] mode (
=
53), this function is only available
for the nal shot.
Adjusting ISO Auto Settings
Still Images
Movies
When the camera is set to [AUTO], maximum ISO speed can be specied
in a range of [400] – [12800], and sensitivity can be specied in a range of
three levels.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ISO
speed] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
31).
z Choose [ISO Auto Settings] and press the
[
] button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
31).
Changing the Noise Reduction Level
(High ISO NR)
You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction: [Standard], [High], [Low].
This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds.
z Press the [
] button, choose [High
ISO NR] on the [ 6] tab, and then
choose the desired option (
=
31).
Not available when images are captured in RAW format
(
=
94).
81
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shadow Correct
Still Images
Movies
Automatically preserve image detail in shadows as follows.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
30).
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
Adjusting Auto ND Filter Settings
For optimal brightness in the scenes you shoot, Auto ND lter reduces
light intensity to 1/8 the actual level, by an amount equivalent to three
stops. Choosing [ ] enables you to reduce the shutter speed and
aperture value.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
When selecting [ ], mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. In this case,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] (
=
54).
ND: Neutral Density
Dynamic Range Correction (DR Correction)
Still Images
Movies
Tone down bright image areas, which might otherwise look washed out,
as follows.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
Options Details
Available ISO Speed
(
=
79)
Automatic adjustment to prevent
washed-out highlights
[AUTO], [125] – [12800]
Tone down highlights by about
200% relative to the brightness level
of [ ].
[AUTO], [250] – [6400]
ISO speed (
=
79) will be adjusted to a speed within the
supported range if you have specied a value outside the
supported range indicated here.
82
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Custom White Balance
Still Images
Movies
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
z Follow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (
=
82) to
choose [ ] or [ ].
z Aim the camera at a plain white subject,
so that the entire screen is white. Press
the [
] button.
z The tint of the screen changes once the
white balance data has been recorded.
Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after
recording white balance data.
Manually Correcting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
You can correct white balance. This adjustment can match the effect of
using a commercially available color temperature conversion lter or color-
compensating lter.
1
Congure the setting.
z Follow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (
=
82) to
choose [ ].
z Turn the [
] dial to adjust the
correction level for B and A.
Image Colors
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)
Still Images
Movies
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
Auto
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for
the shooting conditions.
Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Shade For shooting in the shade.
Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
Tungsten
For shooting under ordinary incandescent
lighting.
Fluorescent For shooting under white uorescent lighting.
Fluorescent H For shooting under daylight uorescent lighting.
Flash For shooting with the ash.
Custom
For manually setting a custom white balance
(
=
82).
83
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Still Images
Movies
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia
or black and white.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
30).
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
My Colors Off
Vivid
Emphasizes contrast and color saturation,
making images sharper.
Neutral
Tones down contrast and color saturation for
subdued images.
Sepia Creates sepia tone images.
B/W Creates black and white images.
Positive Film
Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid
Green, and Vivid Red to produce intense yet
natural-looking colors resembling images on
positive lm.
Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones.
Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones.
Vivid Blue
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky,
ocean, and other blue subjects more vivid.
Vivid Green
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes mountains,
foliage, and other green subjects more vivid.
Vivid Red
Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red
subjects more vivid.
Custom Color
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and
other qualities as desired (
=
84).
2
Congure advanced settings.
z To congure more advanced settings,
press the [ ] button and adjust
the correction level by turning the
[ ][ ] dials or pressing the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z To reset the correction level, press the
[
] button.
z Press the [
] button to complete the
setting.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if
you switch to another white balance option (by following steps
in “Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)” (
=
82)), but
correction levels will be reset if you record custom white balance
data.
B: blue; A: amber; M: magenta; G: green
You can customize camera operation so that the B and A
adjustment screen is accessed simply by turning the [
] or
[
] dial (
=
101).
One level of blue/amber correction is equivalent to about 7
mireds on a color temperature conversion lter. (Mired: Color
temperature unit representing color temperature conversion lter
density)
You can also congure this setting by choosing MENU (
=
31)
► [
6] tab ► [WB Correction].
You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging
the bar in step 1 or the frame in step 2.
84
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Shooting Range and Focusing
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
Still Images
Movies
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For
details on the range of focus, see “Shooting Range” (
=
211).
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
If the ash res, vignetting may occur.
To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod
and shooting with the camera set to [
] (
=
43).
You can also congure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching [
], and then touching it again.
White balance (
=
82) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes.
With [
] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone
may change. These settings may not produce the expected
results with some skin tones.
Custom Color
Still Images
Movies
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Follow the steps in “Changing Image
Color Tones (My Colors)” (
=
83) to
choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then adjust
the setting by turning the [ ] dial.
z For stronger/more intense effects (or
darker skin tones), adjust the value to
the right, and for weaker/lighter effects
(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to
the left.
z Press the [
] button to complete the
setting.
You can also specify a value by touching or dragging the bar.
85
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
When you focus manually, the AF method (
=
87) is [1-point
AF] and AF frame size (
=
88) is [Normal], and these settings
cannot be changed.
Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (
=
41) or
digital tele-converter (
=
87), or when using a TV as a display
(
=
170), but the magnied display will not appear.
To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to
stabilize it.
You can enlarge or hide the magnied display area by adjusting
MENU (
=
31) ► [ 4] tab ► [MF-Point Zoom] settings.
To deactivate automatic focus ne-tuning when the shutter button
is pressed halfway, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 4] tab ►
[Safety MF] ► [Off].
You can move the focusing frame by dragging on the screen in
step 2.
You can lock the focus during movie recording by touching [
].
[
] is then displayed.
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Still Images
Movies
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the
position you specied. For details on the range of focus, see “Shooting
Range” (
=
211).
1
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z [
] and the MF indicator are displayed.
2
Specify the general focal position.
z Referring to the on-screen MF indicator
(1, which shows the distance and focal
position) and the magnied display, turn
the [ ] dial to specify the general focal
position, and then press the [ ] button.
z To adjust the magnication, press the [
]
button.
z During magnied display, you can move
the focusing frame by pressing the [
]
button and then the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
3
Fine-tune the focus.
z Press the shutter button halfway to have
the camera ne-tune the focal position
(Safety MF).
z To cancel manual focus, choose [
] in
step 1.
(
1
)
86
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, and then adjust
the setting by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons
or turning the [ ] dial.
Focus bracketing is only available in [ ] mode (
=
91).
Continuous shooting (
=
44) is not available in this mode.
You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the
[
] button in step 2 of “Shooting in Manual Focus Mode”
(
=
85).
Three shots are taken, regardless of any quantity specied in [
]
(
=
43).
In [Blink Detection] mode (
=
53), this function is only available
for the nal shot.
You can also congure this setting by touching or dragging the
bar on the screen in step 2 to specify a value and then touching
[
].
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Still Images
Movies
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection as needed.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings] on the [ 4] tab,
choose [Peaking], and then choose [On]
(
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
31).
Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots.
Focus Bracketing (Focus-BKT Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot, with the
rst one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther
and nearer focal positions determined by presets. The distance from your
specied focus can be set in three levels.
1
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Bracketing] on the [ 4] tab, and then
choose [ ] (
=
31).
87
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
1-point AF
Still Images
Movies
The camera focuses using a single AF frame. Effective for reliable
focusing. You can also move the frame by touching the screen (
=
90).
A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or
in a corner, rst aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down
(Focus Lock).
The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter
button halfway with [AF-Point Zoom] (
=
53) set to [On].
Digital Tele-Converter
Still Images
Movies
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the
same zoom factor.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [ 3] tab, and then
choose the desired option (
=
31).
z The view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom
lever all the way toward [
] for maximum telephoto, and when
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following
step 2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” (
=
41).
Choosing the AF Method
Still Images
Movies
Change the auto focus (AF) mode to suit shooting conditions.
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
31).
You can also congure this setting by accessing MENU (
=
31)
► [
3] tab ► [AF method].
88
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
You can also access the screen in step 1 by pressing the [ ]
button.
You can also return the AF frame to the original position in the
center by holding down the [
] button.
You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame
(
=
79).
You can also congure the AF frame size by pressing the [ ]
button and choosing [AF Frame Size] on the [
3] tab (
=
31).
+Tracking
Still Images
Movies
Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed around
the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main subject, and
up to two gray frames are displayed around other detected faces.
When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
displayed around faces in focus.
When no faces are detected, or when only gray frames are displayed
(without a white frame), pressing the shutter button halfway will
display green frames in the areas in focus. Note that the maximum
number of frames depends on the aspect ratio (
=
50) setting.
If no faces are detected in Servo AF (
=
89) mode, the AF
frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press the
shutter button halfway.
Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
- Faces in prole, at an angle, or partly hidden
The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
Moving and Resizing AF Frames (1-point AF)
Still Images
Movies
When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame, set the AF
method to [1-point AF].
1
Move the AF frame.
z Touch the screen. An AF frame is
displayed in orange where you touched
(Touch AF).
z Turn the [
] or [ ] dial to move the
AF frame, and press the [ ][ ][ ][ ]
buttons to ne-tune the position.
z To return the AF frame to the original
position in the center, press the [
]
button.
2
Resize the AF frame.
z To reduce the AF frame size, turn the
[ ] ring. Turn it again to restore it to the
original size.
3
Finish the setup process.
z Press the [ ] button.
AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital
zoom (
=
41) or digital tele-converter (
=
87), and in manual
focus mode (
=
85).
89
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing the Focus Setting
Still Images
Movies
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
z Press the [
] button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [ 3] tab, and
then choose [Off] (
=
31).
On
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press the
shutter button halfway.
Off
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus
constantly.
Choosing a Person to Focus On (Face Select)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot after choosing a specic person’s face to focus on.
1
Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]
(=
87).
Shooting with Servo AF
Still Images
Movies
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button and turn the [ ]
dial to choose [SERVO].
2
Focus.
z The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway.
In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the
specied AF method.
Continuous shooting (
=
44) is slower in Servo AF mode.
If optimum exposure cannot be obtained, the shutter speed and
aperture value are displayed in orange. Release the shutter
button, and then press it halfway again.
AF lock shooting is not available.
[AF-Point Zoom] on the [
3] tab (
=
31) is not available.
Not available when using the self-timer (
=
42).
To have the camera keep adjusting the focus during continuous
shooting (
=
44), specify Servo AF with [AF method] set to
[1-point AF].
You can also congure this setting by accessing MENU (
=
31)
► [
3] tab ► [AF operation].
90
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Touch AF)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot after choosing a person’s face or another subject to focus on.
1
Set the AF method to [ +Tracking]
(=
87).
2
Choose a person’s face or another
subject to focus on.
z Touch the subject or person on the
screen.
z When the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [
] is displayed. Focus is
maintained even if the subject moves.
z To cancel Touch AF, touch [
].
3
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button halfway. After
the camera focuses, [ ] changes to a
green [ ].
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
2
Enter Face Select mode.
z Aim the camera at the person’s face and
press the [ ] button.
z After [Face Select : On] is displayed, a
face frame [
] is displayed around the
face detected as the main subject.
z Even if the subject moves, the face frame
[
] follows the subject within a certain
range.
z If a face is not detected, [
] is not
displayed.
3
Choose the face to focus on.
z To switch the face frame [ ] to another
detected face, press the [ ] button.
z Once you cycle through all detected
faces, [Face Select : Off] is displayed,
followed by the selected AF method
screen.
4
Shoot.
z Press the shutter button halfway. After the
camera focuses, [ ] changes to [ ].
z Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
When [Face ID] is set to [On], only the name of the registered
person chosen as the main subject is displayed, even if other
registered people have been detected. However, their names will
be recorded in the still images (
=
45).
91
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Flash
Changing the Flash Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can change the ash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
on the ash range, see “Camera” (
=
210).
1
Lift the ash.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose a ash
mode (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
z The option you congured is now
displayed.
The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button
when the ash is lowered. Lift the ash in advance.
If the ash res, vignetting may occur.
Auto
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
On
Fires for each shot.
If you prefer the camera not to shoot when you touch the screen,
make sure [Touch Shutter] mode is deactivated. Press the
[
] button, choose [Touch Shutter] on the [ 2] tab, and
then choose [Disable] (
=
31).
Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when there is inadequate contrast between
subjects and the background.
Even if you are shooting in [
] mode (
=
84), the camera will
revert to [
] mode if you touch the screen to specify where to
focus.
If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not be displayed when
registered people are detected, but the names will be recorded in
the still images (
=
45). However, a name will be displayed if
the subject chosen to focus on is the same as a person detected
with Face ID.
Shooting with the AF Lock
Still Images
Movies
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will
not change even when you release your nger from the shutter button.
1
Lock the focus.
z With the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the [ ] button.
z The focus is now locked, and [
] and
the MF indicator are displayed.
z
To unlock the focus, hold the shutter
button halfway down and press the [ ]
button again.
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
Cannot be used with Touch Shutter (
=
43).
92
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Still Images
Movies
Just as with regular exposure compensation (
=
78), you can adjust the
ash exposure from –2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
z Raise the ash, press the [
] button and
immediately turn the [ ] dial to choose
the compensation level, and then press
the [ ] button.
z The correction level you specied is now
displayed.
When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value for ash shots to
reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.
However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter
speed and aperture value by accessing MENU (
=
31) and
choosing [
5] tab ► [Flash Control] ► [Safety FE] ► [Off].
You can also congure the ash exposure compensation by
accessing MENU (
=
31) and choosing [ 5] tab ► [Flash
Control] ► [Flash Exp. Comp].
You can also access the [Built-in Flash Settings] screen (
=
31)
as follows (except when an optional external ash is mounted).
- Press and hold the [
] button for at least one second.
- When the ash is up, press the [
] button and immediately
press the [
] button.
Slow Synchro
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of ash range.
In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
54).
In [
] mode, even after the ash res, ensure that the main
subject does not move until the shutter sound is nished playing.
Off
For shooting without the ash.
If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions,
mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still.
You can also congure this setting by pressing the [ ] button,
touching the desired option, and then touching it again.
93
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing the Flash Timing
Still Images
Movies
Change the timing of the ash and shutter release as follows.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Shutter Sync.], and then choose
the desired option (
=
31).
1st-
curtain
The ash res immediately after the shutter opens.
2nd-
curtain
The ash res immediately before the shutter closes.
Shooting with the FE Lock
Still Images
Movies
Just as with the AE lock (
=
78), you can lock the exposure for ash
shots.
1
Raise the ash and set it to [ ]
(=
91).
2
Lock the ash exposure.
z Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked. With the
shutter button pressed halfway, press the
[ ] button.
z The ash res, and when [
] is displayed,
the ash output level is retained.
z To unlock FE, release the shutter button
and press the [
] button again. In this
case, [ ] is no longer displayed.
3
Compose the shot and shoot.
z After one shot, FE is unlocked and [ ] is
no longer displayed.
FE: Flash Exposure
94
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Capturing in RAW Format
The camera can capture images in JPEG and RAW format.
JPEG Images
Processed in the camera for optimal image quality
and compressed to reduce le size. However, the
compression process is irreversible, and images
cannot be restored to their original, unprocessed
state. Image processing may also cause some loss of
image quality.
RAW Images
“Raw” (unprocessed) data, recorded with essentially
no loss of image quality from the camera’s image
processing. The data cannot be used in this state for
viewing on a computer or printing. You must rst use
the software (Digital Photo Professional,
=
176) to
convert images to ordinary JPEG or TIFF les. Images
can be adjusted with minimal loss of image quality.
z Press the [
] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
30).
z To capture in RAW format only, choose
the [
] option.
z To capture images in both JPEG and
RAW format simultaneously, choose the
JPEG image quality, and then press the
[
] button. A [ ] mark is displayed next
to [RAW]. To undo this setting, follow the
same steps and remove the [ ] mark
next to [RAW].
When transferring RAW images (or RAW and JPEG images
recorded together) to a computer, always use the dedicated
software (
=
176).
Digital zoom (
=
41) is not available when capturing images
in RAW format. Additionally, noise reduction level (
=
80),
dynamic range correction (
=
81), shadow correction (
=
81),
and My Colors (
=
83) cannot be congured.
Other Settings
Changing Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
Choose from 8 combinations of size (number of pixels) and compression
(image quality). Also specify whether to capture images in RAW format
(
=
94). For guidelines on how many of each kind of image can t on a
memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (
=
212).
z Follow the steps in “Changing Image
Quality” (
=
50) to adjust the settings.
[ ] and [ ] indicate different levels of image quality depending
on the extent of compression. At the same size (number of
pixels), [
] offers higher image quality. Although [ ] images
have slightly lower image quality, more t on a memory card.
95
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Movies
You can keep image stabilization off until the moment you shoot.
z Follow the steps in “Deactivating Image
Stabilization” (
=
54) to choose [Shoot
Only].
For details on the relationship between the number of recording
pixels and the number of shots that will t on a card, see “Number
of Shots per Memory Card” (
=
212).
The le extension for JPEG images is .JPG, and the extension for
RAW images is .CR2.
Using the Menu
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Image quality] on the [ 1] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
31).
z To capture in RAW format at the same
time, turn the [
] dial and choose
[ ] under [RAW]. Note that only JPEG
images are captured when [−] is selected.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [JPEG], and then choose
the image size and quality. Note that only
RAW images are captured when [−] is
selected.
z When nished, press the [
] button to
return to the menu screen.
[RAW] and [JPEG] cannot both be set to [−].
96
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Camera” (
=
210).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the shutter speed.
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter
speed.
Shutter Speed (Sec.)
Available ISO Speed (
=
79)
30 – 1.3 [AUTO], [125] – [3200]
1 – 1/2000 [AUTO], [125] – [12800]
In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
images to reduce noise.
When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set
[IS Mode] to [Off] (
=
54).
Orange display of the aperture value when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (
=
97).
[ ]: Time value
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots, and
customize the camera for your shooting style
Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the
respective mode.
97
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture
Values ([M] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed
and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Camera”
(
=
210).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Congure the setting.
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter
speed (1).
z Turn the [
] ring to set the aperture value
(2).
z When the ISO speed is xed, an
exposure level mark (4) based on
your specied values is shown on the
exposure level indicator for comparison
to the standard exposure level (3). The
exposure level mark is shown as [
] or
[ ] when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
z The ISO speed is determined and screen
brightness changes when you press
the shutter button halfway after setting
the ISO speed to [AUTO]. If standard
exposure cannot be obtained with your
specied shutter speed and aperture
value, the ISO speed is displayed in
orange.
(
1
) (
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
For details on available aperture values, see “Camera” (
=
210).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the aperture value.
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the aperture
value.
Orange display of the shutter speed when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the optimum exposure has not been
obtained. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).
[ ]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the
diaphragm in the lens)
In [
] and [ ] modes, press the [ ] button and set
[Safety Shift] on the [
6] tab to [On] (
=
31) to have the
camera automatically adjust the shutter speed and aperture value
when there are exposure problems, so that you can shoot at the
optimum exposure.
However, safety shift is disabled when the ash res.
98
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Shooting Long Exposures (Bulb)
With bulb exposures, shots are exposed for as long as you hold down the
shutter button.
1
Specify bulb exposure.
z Set the shutter speed to [BULB], following
steps 1 – 3 in “Specic Shutter Speeds
and Aperture Values ([ ] Mode)”
(
=
97).
2
Shoot.
z Shots are exposed for as long as you
hold the shutter button all the way down.
The elapsed exposure time is displayed
during exposure.
Maximum continuous shooting time with this feature is 4 min.
16 sec.
Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still and prevent camera shake. In this case, also disable image
stabilization (
=
54).
To avoid camera shake that may otherwise occur when pressing
the shutter button directly, you can shoot remotely (
=
155) or
use an optional remote switch (
=
174).
When [Touch Shutter] is set to [Enable], shooting is started by
touching the screen once and stopped by touching it again. Be
careful not to move the camera when touching the screen.
Shutter Speed (Sec.)
Available ISO Speed (
=
79)
[BULB], 30 – 1.3 [AUTO], [125] – [3200]
1 – 1/2000 [AUTO], [125] – [12800]
After you set the shutter speed and aperture value, the exposure
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
Screen brightness may change depending on your specied
shutter speed and aperture value. However, screen brightness
remains the same when the ash is up and the mode is set to [
].
[ ]: Manual
Calculation of optimum exposure is based on the specied
metering method (
=
78).
The following operations are available when ISO speed is set to
[AUTO].
- Adjust exposure by turning the exposure compensation dial.
- Press the [
] button to lock the ISO speed. Screen brightness
changes accordingly.
99
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Recording Movies at Specic Shutter
Speeds and Aperture Values
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed, exposure, aperture value, and ISO
speed.
For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Camera”
(
=
210), and for available ISO speeds, see “Changing the ISO Speed”
(
=
79).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
z Set the mode dial to [ ].
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
30).
2
Congure the settings.
z Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter
speed.
z Turn the [
] ring to set the aperture
value.
3
Shoot.
z Press the movie button.
z You can also adjust settings while
recording, as described in step 2.
Some shutter speeds may cause ickering on the screen when
recording under uorescent or LED lighting, which may be
recorded.
Adjusting the Flash Output
Still Images
Movies
Choose from the three ash levels in [ ][ ][ ] modes.
1
Specify the ash mode.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
31).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Flash Mode], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Manual], and then press
the [
] button.
2
Congure the setting.
z Raise the ash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [ ] dial to choose
the ash level, and then press the [ ]
button.
z Once the setting is complete, the ash
output level is displayed.
[
]: Minimum, [ ]: Medium, [ ]:
Maximum
You can also set the ash level by accessing MENU (
=
31)
and choosing [
5] tab ► [Flash Control] ► [Flash Output].
You can also access the [Flash Control] screen (
=
31) as
follows.
- Press and hold the [
] button for at least one second.
- When the ash is up, press the [
] button and immediately
press the [
] button.
100
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Customizing Controls and Display
Customizing Display Information
Customize what screen is displayed when you press the [ ] button
on the shooting screen. You can also customize what information is
displayed.
1
Access the setting screen.
z On the [ 1] tab, choose [Screen info/
toggle settings] or [VF info/ toggle
settings] in [Shooting information display],
and then press the [ ] button (
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose any screen you prefer not
to display, and then press the [ ] button
to remove the [ ] mark. Pressing the
[ ] button again will add the [ ] mark,
which indicates that it is selected for
display.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
An example of display with the options selected in step 2 is shown
at left for reference.
At least one option must be selected.
In [AUTO] mode, you can also adjust the exposure before
recording by turning the exposure compensation dial.
When the ISO speed is xed, an exposure level mark based on
your specied value is shown on the exposure level indicator for
comparison to the standard exposure level. The exposure level
mark is shown as [
] or [ ] when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 3 stops.
You can check the ISO speed in [AUTO] mode by pressing the
shutter button halfway. If standard exposure cannot be obtained
with your specied shutter speed and aperture value, the ISO
speed is displayed in orange.
Focus can be adjusted during recording by touching [ ] (to
switch it to [
]) and then pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
101
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Assigning Functions to Controls
Still Images
Movies
Reassign functions of the shutter button, [ ] button, [ ] ring, [ ]
dial, or [ ] dial, or assign common functions to the movie button or [ ]
button.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Function Assignment] on the [ 2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button (
=
31).
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ][ ] dials to choose the dial or
button to assign, and then press the [ ]
button.
z When assigning the shutter button, [
]
button, [ ] ring, [ ] dial, or [ ] dial,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the shooting mode or the
camera control, press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose the shooting mode or function,
and then press the [ ] button.
z When assigning the [
] or [ ] button,
press the [ ] button, choose the function
on the screen displayed (either press
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ][ ] dials), and then press the [ ]
button.
Customizing the Information Displayed
z Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Customizing
Display Information” (
=
100) to choose
[Custom display 1] or [Custom display 2],
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose information to display, and
then press the [ ] button to add a [ ]
mark.
z To see an example of display, press the
[
] button to return to the [Screen
info/ toggle settings] or [VF info/ toggle
settings] screen.
For a smaller grid pattern, access [ 1] tab ► [Shooting
information display] ► [Grid display].
102
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Customizing the Quick Set Menu
Still Images
Movies
The display of Quick Set menu items can be customized.
Choosing Items to Include in the Menu
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Quick
setting menu layout] on the [ 2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button (
=
31).
2
Choose icons to include in the
menu.
z Touch icons to include in the Quick Set
menu. Selected icons are marked with
a [ ].
z Selected items (labeled with a [
]) will
be included in display.
z Items without a [
] can be congured on
the [ ] tab of the menu screen.
3
Complete the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, and then
touch [OK].
Up to 11 items can be displayed in the menu.
The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the
[
] button when the Quick Set menu is displayed.
Shutter button or [ ]
button
Set to [AE/AF, no AE lock] to enable focusing
by pressing the [
] button. Note that this
disables the normal [ ] button function of
locking AE. Also note that with Touch Shutter,
the camera will not adjust the focus before
shooting.
[
] ring, [ ] dial,
or [ ] dial
By assigning [
/ ], in [ ] mode you can
set the shutter speed with the [ ] dial and
the aperture value with the [ ] ring.
Movie button
Press the button to activate the assigned
function.
[
] button
To restore the default settings to the movie button and [ ]
button, choose [
] and [ ].
Icons labeled with [
] indicate that the function is not available in
the current shooting mode or under current function conditions.
With [
] or [ ], each press of the assigned button records
white balance data (
=
82), and the white balance setting
changes to [
] or [ ].
With [
], each press of the button that it is assigned to adjusts
and locks the focus, and [
] is displayed on the screen.
With [
], pressing the button that it is assigned to deactivates
screen display. To restore the display, do any of the following.
- Press any button other than the ON/OFF button
- Hold the camera in another orientation
- Open or close the screen
- Raise or lower the ash
You can still record movies in [
], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode even
if you assign a function to the movie button.
103
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Saving Shooting Settings
Still Images
Movies
Save commonly used shooting modes and your congured function
settings for reuse. To access saved settings later, simply turn the mode
dial to [ ]. Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch
shooting modes or turn the camera off (such as self-timer settings) can be
retained this way.
Settings That Can Be Saved
Shooting modes ([ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ])
Items set in [
], [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes (
=
78 –
=
97)
Shooting menu settings
Zoom positions
Manual focus positions (
=
85)
My Menu settings (
=
104)
1
Enter a shooting mode with settings
you want to save, and change the
settings as desired.
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Save
Settings] on the [ 2] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
Rearranging Menu Items
1
Access the setting screen.
z On the screen in step 2 of “Choosing
Items to Include in the Menu” (
=
102),
press the [ ] button.
z Drag an icon to move it to a new position.
2
Complete the setting.
z Press the [ ] button.
104
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
2
Congure the setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select items], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a menu item to save (max.
six items) and then press the [ ] button
to save it.
z [
] is displayed.
z To cancel saving, press the [
] button.
[ ] is no longer displayed.
z Press the [
] button.
3
Rearrange menu items, as needed.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Sort], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Choose a menu item to move (either
press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to change the order, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [
] button.
Grayed-out items in step 2 can also be specied, but they may
not be available in some shooting modes.
To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the
[
] button in Shooting mode, set [Set default view] to [Yes].
On the [Select items] screen for saving or clearing items, you can
also touch items to select them.
On the [Sort] screen, you can also drag items to change the
display order.
3
Save the settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
To edit saved settings (except their shooting mode), choose [ ],
change the settings, and then repeat steps 2 – 3. These setting
details are not applied in other shooting modes.
To clear information you have saved to [ ] and restore default
values, turn the mode dial to [
] and choose [Reset All]
(
=
165).
Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items
(My Menu)
Still Images
Movies
You can save up to six commonly used shooting menu items on the [ 1]
tab. By customizing the [ 1] tab, you can access these items quickly
from a single screen.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [My
Menu settings] on the [ 1] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
31).
105
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Viewing
Still Images
Movies
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Your last shot is displayed.
2
Choose images.
z To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button or turn the
[ ] dial clockwise.
z Press and hold the [
][ ] buttons to
browse through images quickly.
z To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), turn the [
] dial rapidly. In this
mode, turn the [ ] dial to browse through
images.
z To return to single-image display, press
the [
] button.
z To browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the [
][ ] buttons in Scroll
Display mode.
Playback Mode
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit
them in many ways
To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [ ]
button to enter Playback mode.
It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
106
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Touch-Screen Operations
z To view the next image, drag left across
the screen, and to view the previous
image, drag right.
z To access Scroll Display mode, quickly
drag left or right repeatedly.
z You can also browse through images in
Scroll Display mode by dragging left or
right.
z Touching the central image will restore
single-image display.
z To browse images grouped by shooting
date in Scroll Display mode, quickly drag
up or down.
z To start movie playback, touch [
] in
step 2 of “Viewing” (
=
105).
z To adjust the volume during movie
playback, quickly drag up or down across
the screen.
z To stop playback, touch the screen. The
screen shown at left is displayed, and the
following operations are available.
z Touch [
] to display the volume panel,
and then touch [
][ ] to adjust the
volume. At a volume of 0, [
] is displayed.
z To switch frames, touch the scrollbar or
drag left or right.
z To resume playback, touch [
].
z Touch [
] to return to the screen in
step 2 of “Viewing” (
=
105).
z Movies are identied by a [ ] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
3
Play movies.
z To start playback, press the [ ] button to
access the movie control panel, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button again.
4
Adjust the volume.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
volume.
z To adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press
the [
][ ] buttons.
5
Pause playback.
z To pause or resume playback, press the
[ ] button.
z After the movie is nished, [
] is
displayed.
To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 5]
tab ► [Scroll Display] ► [Off].
To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
mode, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 5] tab ► [Resume] ►
[Last shot].
To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
(
=
31) and choose your desired effect on the [ 5] tab ►
[Transition Effect].
(
1
)
107
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Switching display modes is not possible while the camera is
connected via Wi-Fi to devices other than printers.
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
Washed-out highlights in the image ash on the screen in detailed
information display (
=
107).
Histogram
Still Images
Movies
z The graph in detailed information display
(
=
107) is a histogram showing the
distribution of brightness in the image.
The horizontal axis represents the degree
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how
much of the image is at each level of
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a
way to check exposure.
z The histogram can also be accessed
while shooting (
=
100,
=
191).
RGB Histogram, GPS Information Display
Still Images
Movies
z The RGB histogram shows the
distribution of shades of red, green, and
blue in an image. The horizontal axis
represents R, G, or B brightness, and the
vertical axis, how much of the image is
at that level of brightness. Viewing this
histogram enables you to check image
color characteristics.
Switching Display Modes
Still Images
Movies
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or
to hide the information. For details on the information displayed, see
“Playback (Detailed Information Display)” (
=
192).
Open the screen to activate it when the camera is on. This will deactivate
the viewnder. Similarly, close the screen (facing the camera body) to
deactivate it and activate the viewnder (
=
20).
No Information Display
Simple Information Display
Detailed Information Display
RGB Histogram, GPS Information
Display
108
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
2
Play the movie.
z Select a movie and press the [ ] button
to play it.
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Still Images
Movies
View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode (
=
37) on a
day of still image shooting as follows.
1
Choose an image.
z Still images shot in [ ] mode are
labeled with [ ] icon.
z Choose a still image labeled with [
]
and press the [ ] button.
2
Play the digest movie.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
z The movie recorded automatically on the
day of still image shooting is played back,
from the beginning.
After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when you are
using the camera with information display deactivated (
=
107).
z Using a smartphone connected to the
camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images
on the camera, adding information such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation
(
=
155). You can review this information
in the GPS information display.
z Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
[---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available
on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time
GPS information display is not available for images that lack this
information.
You can also switch between the RGB histogram (still images
only) and GPS information display by dragging the lower half of
the screen upward or downward in detailed information display.
Viewing Short Movies Recorded in Creative
Shot Mode (Creative Shot Movies)
Still Images
Movies
Play back Creative Shot movies recorded in [ ] mode (
=
58).
1
Choose a movie.
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Play Creative Shot Movies] on the [ 2]
tab (
=
31).
109
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Browsing and Filtering Images
Navigating through Images in an Index
Still Images
Movies
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly nd the images
you are looking for.
1
Display images in an index.
z Move the zoom lever toward [ ] to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
z To display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [
]. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
2
Choose an image.
z Turn the [ ] dial to scroll through the
images.
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image.
z An orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
z Press the [
] button to view the selected
image in single-image display.
To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial rapidly), choose MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 5] tab ► [Index Effect] ► [Off].
Viewing by Date
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
z Press the [
] button, choose [List/
Play Digest Movies] on the [ 2] tab,
and then touch a date (
=
31).
Checking People Detected in Face ID
Still Images
Movies
If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (
=
107),
the names of up to ve detected people registered in Face ID (
=
45)
will be displayed.
z Press the [
] button several
times until simple information display
is activated, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an
image.
z Names will be displayed on detected
people.
If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using
Face ID, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 3] tab ► [Face ID Info]
► [Name Display] ► [Off].
110
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
1
Choose the rst condition.
z In single-image display, press the [ ]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
choose a condition.
z When [
] or [ ] is selected, you can
view only images matching this condition
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial. To perform an action for all
of these images together, press the [ ]
button and go to step 3.
2
Choose the second condition and
view the ltered images.
z When you have selected [ ] or [ ] as
the rst condition, choose the second
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then
turn the [ ] dial to view only matching
images.
z To switch to ltered image display, press
the [
] button and go to step 3.
z When you have selected [
] as the rst
condition, press the [ ] button, and
press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the
next screen to choose a person.
3
View the ltered images.
z Images matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons, or
turn the [ ] dial.
z To cancel ltered display, press the [
]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
then press the [ ] button again.
When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
Touch-Screen Operations
z Pinch in to switch from single-image
display to index display.
z To view more thumbnails per screen,
pinch in again.
z Drag up or down on the screen to scroll
through displayed images.
z To view fewer thumbnails per screen,
spread your ngers apart.
z Touch an image to choose it, and touch it
again to view it in single-image display.
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions
Still Images
Movies
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by ltering
image display according to your specied conditions. You can also protect
(
=
115) or delete (
=
118) these images all at once.
Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (
=
121).
Shot Date
Displays the images shot on a specic date.
People
Displays images with detected faces.
Still image/
Movie
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in [
]
mode (
=
37).
Name
Displays images of a registered person (
=
46).
111
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images
Still Images
Movies
Use the front dial to nd and jump between desired images quickly by
ltering image display according to your specied conditions.
Jump to Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (
=
121).
Jump Shot Date
Jumps to the rst image in each group of
images that were shot on the same date.
Single image
Jumps by 1 image at a time.
Jump 10 Images
Jumps by 10 images at a time.
Jump 100 Images
Jumps by 100 images at a time.
1
Choose a condition.
z Choose a condition (or jump method) in
single-image display by turning the [ ]
dial and immediately pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons.
2
View images matching your specied
condition, or jump by the specied
amount.
z Turn the [ ] dial to view only images
matching the condition or jump by the
specied number of images forward or
back.
Touch-Screen Operations
z You can also jump to the previous or next
image according to your jump method
chosen in step 1 of “Using the Front Dial
to Jump between Images” (
=
111) by
dragging left or right with two ngers.
To hide or view other information, press the [ ] button in
step 3.
Options for viewing the images found (in step 3) include
“Navigating through Images in an Index” (
=
109), “Magnifying
Images” (
=
114), and “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
114). You can
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing
[Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (
=
115) or
[Select All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once”
(
=
118), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
182), or
“Adding Images to a Photobook” (
=
184).
If you edit images and save them as new images (
=
123 –
=
128), a message is displayed, and the images that were
found are no longer shown.
You can also choose conditions by touching the screens in
steps 1 and 2.
After choosing conditions, you can view images matching your
conditions by touching a condition again.
112
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
During group playback (step 3), you can browse through images
quickly “Navigating through Images in an Index” (
=
109) and
magnify them “Magnifying Images” (
=
114). You can apply your
actions to all images in the group at once by choosing [Protect All
Images in Group] in “Protecting Images” (
=
115), [All Images in
Group] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (
=
118), [Select All
in Group] in “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
182),
or [Select All Images] in “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(
=
184).
To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single
still images, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 5] tab ► [Group
Images] ► [Off] (
=
31). However, grouped images cannot be
ungrouped during individual playback.
In [
] mode, the simultaneous display after step 2 in “Applying
Effects Automatically (Creative Shot)” (
=
58) is only shown
immediately after you shoot.
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Still Images
Movies
Images shot continuously (
=
44), images shot in [ ] mode (
=
58),
and individual still images saved as source data in [ ] mode (
=
70)
are grouped, and only the rst image is displayed. However, you can also
view the images individually.
1
Choose a grouped image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image labeled with
[ ].
2
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
30).
3
View images in the group
individually.
z Pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning the
[ ] dial will display only images in the
group.
z To cancel group playback, press the [
]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
press the [ ] button again (
=
30).
113
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
4
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite with.
z Follow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
Face Information” (
=
48) to choose
the name of the person you want to
overwrite with.
You can also access the [Edit ID Info] screen by touching an
image on the screen in step 2, touching [
] to display the
orange frame, and then touching the face to overwrite its name.
You can also choose editing options by touching them in step 3.
Erasing Names
z On the screen displayed in step 3 in
“Changing Names” (
=
113), choose
[Erase] and press the [ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
Editing Face ID Information
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it
or erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased.
Changing Names
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Face ID Info] on the [ 3] tab (
=
31).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Edit ID Info], and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Following the procedure in “Checking
People Detected in Face ID” (
=
109),
choose an image and press the [ ]
button.
z An orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
displayed in an image, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose the
name to change, and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Choose the editing option.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [Overwrite], and
then press the [ ] button.
114
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Touch-Screen Operations
z Spread your ngers apart (pinch out) to
zoom in.
z You can magnify images up to about 10x
by repeating this action.
z To move the display position, drag across
the screen.
z Pinch in to zoom out.
z Touch [
] to restore single-image
display.
Viewing Slideshows
Still Images
Movies
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.
z Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [ 1] tab
(
=
31).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Start], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
z Press the [
] button to stop the
slideshow.
The camera’s power-saving functions (
=
27) are deactivated
during slideshows.
Image Viewing Options
Magnifying Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Magnify an image.
z Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] will
zoom in and magnify the image. You
can magnify images up to about 10x by
continuing to hold the zoom lever.
z The approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
z To zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward [
]. You can return to single-
image display by continuing to hold it.
2
Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
z To move the display position, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z To switch to other images while zoomed,
turn the [
] dial.
You can return to single-image display from magnied display by
pressing the [
] button.
You can check the focus when [
] is displayed by pressing
the [
] button to show the position in focus (Focus Check).
When multiple positions are in focus, press the [
] button
repeatedly to switch to other positions.
(
1
)
115
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Protecting Images
Still Images
Movies
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure (
=
118).
z Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial). [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel protection, choose [OFF]. [
]
is no longer displayed.
Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
the card (
=
160).
Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function. To erase them this way, rst cancel protection.
Using the Menu
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Protect] on the [ 1] tab (
=
31).
2
Choose a selection method.
z Choose an option as desired (
=
31).
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial. For fast-forward or fast-
rewind, hold the [
][ ] buttons down.
You can congure slideshow repetition, display time per image,
and the transition between images on the screen accessed by
choosing [Set up] and pressing the [
] button (
=
31).
You can also stop slideshows by touching the screen.
116
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
z Following the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (
=
115), choose [Select Range]
and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a starting image.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an ending image.
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Images before the rst image cannot be
selected as the last image.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
z Following the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (
=
115), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Protect the image.
z Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in step 3.
You can also select or clear images by touching the screen in
step 2, and you can access the conrmation screen by touching
[
].
You can also protect images by touching [OK] on the screen in
step 3.
117
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
4
Protect the images.
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect],
and then press the [ ] button.
You can also choose the rst or last image by turning the [ ] dial
when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed.
To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in
step 4.
You can also display the screen for choosing the rst or last
image by touching an image on the top screen in steps 2 or 3.
You can also protect images by touching [Protect] on the screen
in step 4.
Protecting All Images at Once
1
Choose [Protect All Images].
z Following the procedure in “Using the
Menu” (
=
115), choose [Protect All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
2
Protect the images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
118
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
images (
=
115) cannot be erased.
Choosing a Selection Method
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Erase] on the [ 1] tab
(
=
31).
2
Choose a selection method.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a selection method, and
then press the [ ] button.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Erasing Images
Still Images
Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
protected images (
=
115) cannot be erased.
1
Choose an image to erase.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
2
Erase the image.
z Press the [ ] button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The current image is now erased.
z To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose
[Cancel], and then press the [ ] button.
For images captured in both RAW and JPEG format, pressing the
[
] button while the image is displayed gives you the option of
choosing [Erase
], [Erase ], or [Erase ].
You can also erase the current image by touching [Erase] on the
screen in step 2.
Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions (
=
122).
119
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
118), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose images.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
116) to specify images.
3
Erase the images.
z Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase],
and then press the [ ] button.
Specifying All Images at Once
1
Choose [Select All Images].
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
118), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
2
Erase the images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
118), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(
=
116), [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Erase the images.
z Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Choosing an image captured in both RAW and JPEG format will
erase both versions.
120
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
2
Rotate the image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
z The image is rotated 90° each time you
press the [
] button.
z To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
On the screen in step 2, you can also touch [ ] to rotate
images or touch [
] to return to the menu screen.
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Auto
Rotate] on the [ 5] tab, and then
choose [Off] (
=
31).
Images cannot be rotated (
=
120) when you set [Auto Rotate]
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
Rotating Images
Still Images
Movies
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
1
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
30).
2
Rotate the image.
z Press the [ ] or [ ] button, depending
on the desired direction. Each time you
press the button, the image is rotated
90°. Press the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]
(
=
120).
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Rotate].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Rotate] on the [ 1] tab (
=
31).
121
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
3
Complete the setting.
z Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in
step 3.
Tagging images as favorites makes it easier to add them when
creating albums (
=
129).
You can also select or clear current images by touching the
screen in step 2.
Images can also be tagged as favorites by using Touch Actions
(
=
122).
Tagging Images as Favorites
Still Images
Movies
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in ltered playback, you can restrict the following operations to
all of those images.
“Viewing” (
=
105), “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
114), “Protecting
Images” (
=
115), “Erasing Images” (
=
118), “Adding Images to
the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
182), “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(
=
184)
z Press the [
] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
30).
z To untag the image, repeat this process
and choose [OFF], and then press the
[
] button.
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Favorites].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Favorites] on the [ 1] tab (
=
31).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
z To untag the image, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
122
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
2
Assign a function to a Touch Action.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a dragging pattern, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a function to assign.
Assignable Functions
Slideshow Start a slideshow.
Erase Erase an image.
Protect Protect an image or cancel protection.
Rotate Rotate an image.
Favorites Tag images as favorites, or untag the image.
Next Favorite
Switch to displaying the next image tagged as
a favorite.
Previous Favorite
Switch to displaying the previous image tagged
as a favorite.
Next Date
Switch to displaying the rst image with the next
shooting date.
Previous Date
Switch to displaying the rst image with the
previous shooting date.
To Camera
Access the Wi-Fi connection screen.
For Wi-Fi details, see “Wi-Fi Functions”
(
=
133).
To Smartphone
To Computer
To Printer
To Web Service
Convenient Control: Touch Actions
Still Images
Movies
You can quickly and easily activate functions that you have assigned to
four touch gestures (Touch Actions), in single-image display.
Using Touch Actions Functions
z Drag across the screen as shown.
z The function assigned to [
] is now
activated.
z Similarly, you can also activate functions
assigned to [
], [ ], and [ ] by
dragging across the screen.
z Customize functions assigned to Touch
Actions as desired.
Changing Touch Actions Functions
Simplify your preferred camera operations by reassigning dragging
patterns to them as desired.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Set Touch Actions] on the [ 6]
tab (
=
31).
123
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
3
Review the new image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The saved image is now displayed.
Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [
].
RAW images cannot be edited.
Images cannot be resized to a higher number of recording pixels.
You can also view saved images by touching [Yes] on the screen
in step 3.
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Resize].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Resize] on the [ 3] tab (
=
31).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an image size.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the size, and then press
the [ ] button.
Editing Still Images
Image editing (
=
123 –
=
126) is only available when the
memory card has sufcient free space.
You can access editing screens for various functions by touching
an image after choosing the function in the menu.
When [
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
[
] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
When [
] is shown on an editing screen, you can touch
[
] instead of pressing the [ ] button, if you prefer.
Resizing Images
Still Images
Movies
Save a copy of images at a lower number of recording pixels.
1
Choose an image size.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose an image size
(
=
30).
z Press the [
] button.
2
Save the new image.
z After [Save new image?] is displayed,
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The image is now saved as a new le.
124
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
123).
Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [
] or resized to [ ] (
=
123).
RAW images cannot be edited.
Cropped images cannot be cropped again.
Cropped images cannot be resized.
Cropped images will have a lower number of recording pixels than
uncropped images.
While previewing the cropped image in step 3, you can resize,
move, and adjust the aspect ratio of the cropping frame.
Operations in step 2 are also possible by pressing the [
]
button, choosing [
3] tab ► [Cropping], pressing the [ ]
button, choosing an image, and pressing the [
] button again.
If you crop still images shot using Face ID (
=
45), only the
names of the people left in the cropped image will remain.
You can also move the cropping frame in step 2 by dragging it.
You can also resize frames by pinching in or out (
=
114) on the
screen.
Operations are also possible by touching [
], [ ], [ ], and
[
] on the top of the screen in step 2.
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Follow step 2 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
123).
z Press the [
] button and follow
step 3 in “Resizing Images” (
=
123).
Cropping
Still Images
Movies
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image le.
1
Access the setting screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then press the [ ] button
(
=
30).
2
Resize, move, and adjust the aspect
ratio of the cropping frame.
z To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
z To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z To change the frame orientation, turn the
[
] dial to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
z To change the frame aspect ratio, turn
the [
] dial to choose [ ]. To switch
between aspect ratios ([ ], [ ],
[ ], and [ ]), press the [ ] button
repeatedly.
3
Preview the cropped image.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose [ ].
z To switch display between the cropped
image and the cropping frame, press the
[
] button repeatedly.
125
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly
from the color of images shot using My Colors (
=
83).
You can also congure this setting by touching an option to select
it on the screen in step 3 and then touching it again.
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Still Images
Movies
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be
detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufcient
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects
stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the
image as a separate le.
1
Choose [i-Contrast].
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [i-Contrast] on the [ 3] tab
(
=
31).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an option.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Still Images
Movies
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a
separate le. For details on each option, see “Changing Image Color
Tones (My Colors)” (
=
83).
1
Choose [My Colors].
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [My Colors] on the [ 3] tab
(
=
31).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an option.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Follow step 2 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
123).
z Press the [
] button and follow
step 3 in “Resizing Images” (
=
123).
Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be
a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the
desired color.
Colors of RAW images cannot be edited.
126
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
3
Correct the image.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Red-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
z Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”
(
=
114).
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
z The image is now saved as a new le.
z Press the [
] button and follow
step 3 in “Resizing Images” (
=
123).
Some images may not be corrected accurately.
To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be
erased.
Protected images cannot be overwritten.
RAW images cannot be edited this way.
Red-eye correction can be applied to JPEG images also captured
in RAW format, but the original image cannot be overwritten.
You can also save images by touching [New File] or [Overwrite]
on the screen in step 4.
4
Save as a new image and review.
z Follow step 2 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
123).
z Press the [
] button and follow
step 3 in “Resizing Images” (
=
123).
For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause
images to appear grainy.
Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.
RAW images cannot be edited this way.
If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting
images using [Low], [Medium], or [High].
You can also congure this setting by touching [ ][ ] on the
screen in step 3.
Correcting Red-Eye
Still Images
Movies
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate le.
1
Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
z Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the
[ 3] tab (
=
31).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
127
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
4
Save the edited movie.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [New File], and
then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the [
] button.
z The movie is now saved as a new le.
The following movies cannot be edited this way: digest movies
(
=
37), Creative Shot movies (
=
59), or albums without
background music (
=
130).
To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be
erased.
If the memory card lacks sufcient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack
or an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
=
169).
You can also edit movies by touching the movie editing panel or
editing bar.
Editing Movies
Still Images
Movies
You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of movies.
1
Choose [ ].
z Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
(
=
105), choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
z The movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
2
Specify portions to cut.
z (1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ]
or [ ].
z To specify a portion to cut (indicated by
[
]), press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to move the orange [ ] or
[ ] icon. Cut the beginning of the movie
(from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the
end of the movie by choosing [ ].
z If you move [
] or [ ] to a position other
than a [ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before
the nearest [ ] mark on the left will be
cut, while in [ ] the portion after the
nearest [ ] mark on the right will be cut.
3
Review the edited movie.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button. The
edited movie is now played.
z To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
z To cancel editing, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
(
1
)
(
2
)
128
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Erasing Movie Chapters
Still Images
Movies
Individual chapters (clips) recorded in [ ] or [ ] mode (
=
37,
=
59) can be erased. Be careful when erasing clips, because they
cannot be recovered.
1
Select the clip to erase.
z Play a short movie as described in
steps 1 – 2 of “Viewing Short Movies
Recorded in Creative Shot Mode
(Creative Shot Movies)” (
=
108) or
“Viewing Short Movies Created When
Shooting Still Images (Digest Movies)”
(
=
108), and then press the [ ] button
to access the movie control panel.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ] or [ ], and then press
the [ ] button to choose a clip.
2
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
3
Conrm erasure.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
[ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
Reducing File Sizes
Movie le sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
z On the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [
]. Choose [New File],
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the [
] button.
Image Quality of Compressed Movies
Before Compression After Compression
,
,
[ ][ ] movies cannot be compressed.
Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you
choose [Overwrite].
Compressing movies to [
] or [ ] reduces the le
size while maintaining the same image quality.
129
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
1
Choose an image.
z Choose an image in single-image display.
z Themes available in step 3 will vary
depending on image shooting date and
Face ID information.
2
Access the home screen.
z Press the [ ] button.
z After [Busy] is displayed, the home
screen is displayed.
3
Preview an album.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
person or [Date] or [Event] as the album
theme, and then press the [ ] button.
z After [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, the album is played.
4
Save the album.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Save Album as Movie], and then press
the [ ] button.
z Once the album is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
5
Play the album (
=
105).
Viewing Albums (Story Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
You can choose themes such as a date or person’s name to create an
album of automatically selected images that match the theme. These
images are combined into a slideshow that can be saved as a short movie
of about 2 – 3 minutes.
Before using this feature, make sure the battery pack is fully charged.
Creating albums also requires free space on the memory card. As a
guideline, use a memory card with a capacity of 16 GB or higher, and
ensure at least 1 GB of free space.
Choosing Themes for Albums
Press the [ ] button to access the home screen and choose the theme
for the camera to use when selecting album elements. Note that the
camera is more likely to add images tagged as favorites (
=
121) to
albums.
Date
Creates an album of images shot on the same day.
Images are selected from those shot on the same day as
the image displayed before you access the home screen.
Person’s
name
Can be used to create monthly albums of people, such as
albums of children as they grow up.
Subjects whose Face ID information you registered before
shooting may be selected for albums.
Images selected are those that have the same subject shot
during the same month as the image displayed before you
access the home screen.
Event
A good choice for albums of vacations, parties, or other
events.
Images are selected from those shot during the event
before and after the image displayed before you access
the home screen.
Custom
Includes images based on your specied images, dates, or
people registered in Face ID.
130
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
z The screen at left is displayed when
you use a new or recently formatted
memory card. Choose [OK] (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
press the [ ] button, and wait about four
minutes until the seven types of music
are registered to the card.
z When using a memory card with music
already registered to it, go to step 2.
2
Create the album.
z Follow steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (
=
129) to create an
album.
3
Congure background music
settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the desired item, press the
[ ] button, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial to choose an
option (
=
31).
4
Save the album.
z Follow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (
=
129) to save albums.
Once albums are saved, background music cannot be added later.
Background music in albums cannot be removed or changed.
Chapters of albums with background music cannot be edited
(
=
128).
Albums can include following images captured by the camera.
- Still images
- Digest movies (
=
37), except compressed movies
- Short movie clips (
=
75) of two seconds or longer, or
Creative Shot movies (
=
59), except compressed movies
Albums cannot be saved unless there is enough space on the
memory card.
To jump to the next chapter during the preview, drag left, and to
jump to the previous chapter, drag right.
You can specify the color effect in step 4 by choosing [Change
Color Effect] and pressing the [
] button. To preview how the
album looks with your selected effect applied, choose [Preview
Album Again] on the screen in step 4 after pressing the [
][ ]
buttons to choose a color effect and pressing the [
] button.
To play saved albums, choose [List of Albums] on the Story
Highlights home screen, press the [
] button, choose a listed
album, and press the [
] button again.
Adding Background Music to Albums
Still Images
Movies
Choose from seven kinds of background music to play during album playback.
1
Register background music to a
memory card.
z Following steps 1 – 4 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (
=
129), choose
[Music Settings] and press the [ ] button.
131
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
4
Choose background music.
z When the screen at left is displayed,
choose [Music Settings]. Add background
music as described in “Adding
Background Music to Albums” (
=
130),
and then press the [ ] button.
5
Choose a color effect.
z On the screen in step 4 of “Viewing
Albums (Story Highlights)” (
=
129),
choose [Change Color Effect].
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose a
color effect, and then press the [ ]
button.
6
Save the album.
z Follow step 4 in “Viewing Albums (Story
Highlights)” (
=
129) to save albums.
You can specify up to 40 les (or 10 movie les) after choosing
[Image Selection]. The second time you create a custom album,
[Select images based on previous settings?] is displayed. To
use previously selected images as the basis, choose [Yes]. The
previous stills, clips, or Creative Shot movies are labeled with
[
], and multiple images are displayed.
Up to 15 dates can be selected if you choose [Date Selection].
The color effect may not be applied to some images.
If you prefer not to add background music, set [Add BGM] to [No]
on the screen in step 3.
To use only background music instead of movie audio, set [Audio
Mixer] to [BGM only] on the screen in step 3.
To listen to a sample of the background music selected in [Track],
choose [Sample BGM] on the screen in step 3 and press the [
]
button.
Creating Your Own Albums
Still Images
Movies
Create your own albums by choosing desired images.
1
Choose to create a Custom album.
z Following steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing Albums
(Story Highlights)” (
=
129), choose
[Custom] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a selection method.
z Choose [Image Selection], [Date
Selection], or [Person Selection], and
then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose album elements.
z Once you select the elements for your
album and press the [ ] button, your
selected elements are labeled with [ ].
z Press the [
] button after you
are nished selecting still images, short
clips, or Creative Shot movies in [Image
Selection], dates in [Date Selection], or
people in [Person Selection].
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Preview], and then press
the [ ] button.
132
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
4
Save the movie.
z Choose [Save], and then press the [ ]
button.
z Once the movie is saved, [Saved] is
displayed.
5
Play the movie.
z Choose [Play Back Movie] on the
screen in step 1 to view a list of movies
you have created.
z Choose the movie to play and press the
[
] button.
To play the selected clip, move the zoom lever toward [ ] on the
screen in step 2.
To rearrange clips, press the [
] button on the screen in step 2,
select a clip, press the [
] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [
] dial, and then press the [ ] button again.
To apply a color effect, choose [Change Color Effect] on the
screen in step 3.
To add background music, choose [Music Settings] on the screen
in step 3 (
=
130).
The image quality of movies saved is [
] (for NTSC) or
[
] (for PAL).
Use a fully charged battery pack, if possible.
Combining Short Clips
Still Images
Movies
Combine short clips to create a longer movie.
Note that movies created this way are not included in Story Highlights
albums (
=
129).
1
Access the editing screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Short
Clip Mix] on the [ 2] tab, and then
choose [Merge Clips] (
=
31).
2
Specify clips to combine.
z Drag clips on the top of the screen left or
right, choose a clip to combine, and press
the [ ] button.
z Your selected clip is displayed on the
bottom of the screen.
z To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again.
z Repeat these steps to specify other clips
to combine.
z After you are nished selecting clips,
press the [
] button.
3
Preview the movie.
z Choose [Preview] and press the [ ]
button.
z After [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, a preview of the combined clips
is played.
133
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Available Wi-Fi Features
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
Smartphones and Tablets
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi
functions. You can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots from a
smartphone or tablet.
For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and other
compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.
Computer
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via
Wi-Fi.
Web Services
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to
send camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera
can also be sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY.
Printers
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting
DPS over IP) to print them.
Another Camera
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi-compatible Canon cameras.
Wi-Fi Functions
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety
of compatible devices, and use the camera with Web
services
Before using Wi-Fi, be sure to read “Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
Precautions” (
=
216).
134
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible
Smartphone
Use an Android (OS version 4.0 or later) smartphone’s NFC to simplify the
process of installing Camera Connect and connecting to the camera.
Operation when devices are initially connected via NFC varies depending
on the camera mode when the devices are touched together.
If the camera is off or in Shooting mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images on the image selection
screen. Once the devices are connected, you can also shoot remotely
and geotag your shots (
=
155). It’s easy to reconnect to recent
devices, which are listed in the Wi-Fi menu.
If the camera is in Playback mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images from the index display
shown for image selection. The connection is ended automatically
after image transfer.
Follow the instructions in the following section for NFC-initiated connection
to a camera that is off or in Shooting mode.
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in Shooting
Mode
1
Install Camera Connect.
z Activate NFC on the smartphone and
touch the devices’ N-Marks ( ) together
to start Google Play on the smartphone
automatically. Once the Camera Connect
download page is displayed, download
and install the app.
Sending Images to a Smartphone
There are several ways to connect the camera to a smartphone and send
images.
Connect via NFC (
=
134)
Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0
or later) against the camera to connect the devices.
Connect to a device assigned to the [
] button (
=
136)
Simply press the [ ] button to connect the devices. This simplies
sending images to a smartphone (
=
136). Note that only one
smartphone can be assigned to the [ ] button.
Connect via the Wi-Fi menu (
=
137)
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated
Camera Connect app on the smartphone. For details on this application
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon
website.
Canon Wi-Fi-compatible camera owners who use CameraWindow
to connect their camera via Wi-Fi to a smartphone should
consider switching to the Camera Connect mobile app.
135
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
4
Send an image.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
z Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
z To end the connection, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] on the conrmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button. You can also use the smartphone
to end the connection.
When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This
may damage the devices.
- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
together in slightly different positions. If connection is not
established, keep the devices together until the camera screen
is updated.
- If you attempt connection when the camera is off, a message
may be displayed on the smartphone reminding you to turn on
the camera. If so, turn the camera on and touch the devices
together again.
- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 3. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 3.
Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (
=
156).
2
Establish the connection.
z Make sure the camera is off or in
Shooting mode.
z Touch the N-Mark (
) on the smartphone
with Camera Connect installed against
the camera’s N-Mark.
z The camera starts up automatically.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Camera Connect is started on the
smartphone.
z The devices are connected automatically.
3
Adjust the privacy setting.
z When this screen is displayed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [Yes], and then press the [ ]
button.
z You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
136
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
If during connection a message on the camera requests you to
enter the nickname, follow step 2 in “Connecting via NFC When
Camera Is Off or in Shooting Mode” (
=
134) to enter it.
The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect
to via NFC in Playback mode.
You can preset images to transfer at your desired size (
=
152).
Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the
Button
Once you have connected to a smartphone initially by pressing the [ ]
button, you can simply press the [ ] button after that to connect again for
viewing and saving camera images on your connected device.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
139).
1
Install Camera Connect.
z For an iPhone or iPad, nd Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
z For Android smartphones, nd Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
2
Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [ ] button.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 2 (
=
32).
Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark (
). For
details, refer to the smartphone user manual.
You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
150).
To disable NFC connections, choose MENU (
=
31) ► [ 4] tab
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [NFC] ► [Off].
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
z Touch the smartphone with Camera
Connect installed (
=
134) against the
camera’s N-Mark ( ).
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [ ]
button. [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
z After you nish choosing images, press
the [
] button, choose [OK], and
then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
z The images are now sent. The
connection is ended automatically after
the image is sent.
137
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
7
Import images.
z Use the smartphone to import images
from the camera to the smartphone.
z
Use the smartphone to end the connection;
the camera will automatically turn off.
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 2 (
=
157).
For better security, you can display a password on the screen
in step 3 by accessing MENU (
=
31) and choosing [ 4] tab
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Password] ► [On]. In this case, in the
password eld on the smartphone in step 4, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
One smartphone can be registered to the [
] button. To assign
a different one, rst clear the current one in MENU (
=
31) ►
[
4] tab ► [Mobile Device Connect Button].
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
139).
1
Install Camera Connect.
z For an iPhone or iPad, nd Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
z For Android smartphones, nd Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
3
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The camera’s SSID is displayed.
4
Connect the smartphone to the
network.
z In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
5
Start Camera Connect.
z Start Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
z After the camera recognizes the
smartphone, a device selection screen is
displayed.
6
Choose the smartphone to connect to.
z Choose the smartphone (either by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or by turning
the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button.
z After a connection is established with
the smartphone, the smartphone name
is displayed on the camera. (This screen
will close in about one minute.)
138
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
6
Send an image.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
z Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
z To end the connection, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] on the conrmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial), and then press the [ ]
button. You can also use the smartphone
to end the connection.
z To add multiple smartphones, repeat the
above procedure starting from step 1.
All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 5. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 5.
Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (
=
156).
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off].
You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
150).
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
] button.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, choose [OK] (
=
136).
3
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
4
Choose [Add a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
z The camera’s SSID is displayed.
z Choose the smartphone to connect to,
as described in steps 4 – 6 of “Sending
to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button”
(
=
136).
5
Adjust the privacy setting.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Yes], and then press the
[
] button.
z You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
139
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
5
Congure the privacy settings and
send images.
z Follow steps 5 – 6 in “Adding a
Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
137) to congure the privacy
settings and send images.
Previous Access Points
To reconnect to a previous access point automatically, follow step 3 in
“Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (
=
136) or step 4 in
“Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (
=
137).
To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
To reconnect to a previous access point, follow the procedure from
step 5 in “Using Another Access Point” (
=
139).
To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure in “Using Another Access Point” (
=
139) from step 4.
Using Another Access Point
When connecting the camera to a smartphone with the [ ] button or
through the Wi-Fi menu, you can also use an existing access point.
1
Prepare for the connection.
z Access the [Waiting to connect] screen
by either following steps 1 – 3 in “Sending
to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button”
(
=
136) or steps 1 – 4 in “Adding a
Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
137).
2
Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
3
Choose [Switch Network].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Switch Network], and then
press the [ ] button.
z A list of detected access points will be
displayed.
4
Connect to the access point and
choose the smartphone.
z For WPS-compatible access points,
connect to the access point and
choose the smartphone as described in
steps 5 – 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (
=
142).
z For non-WPS access points, follow
steps 2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed
Access Points” (
=
144) to connect
to the access point and choose the
smartphone.
140
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
z Choose your country or region, and
then follow the instructions displayed to
prepare for downloading.
z The compressed software is now
downloaded to your computer.
2
Begin the installation.
z Double-click the downloaded le, and
when the screen at left is displayed, click
[Easy Installation]. Follow the on-screen
instructions to complete the installation
process.
z Installation may take some time,
depending on computer performance and
the Internet connection.
z Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
after installation.
Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
To uninstall the software, follow these steps.
- Windows: Select [Start] menu ► [All Programs] ► [Canon
Utilities], and then choose the software for uninstallation.
- Mac OS: In the [Canon Utilities] folder within the [Applications]
folder, drag the folder of the software for uninstallation to the
Trash, and then empty the Trash.
Saving Images to a Computer
Preparing to Register a Computer
Checking Your Computer Environment
The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following
operating systems. For detailed system requirements and compatibility
information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon
website.
Windows 8/8.1
Windows 7 SP1
Mac OS X 10.9
Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later
Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
For details, check the following website.
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.
1
Download the software.
z Visit the following site from a computer
connected to the Internet.
http://www.canon.com/icpd/
141
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Saving Images to a Connected Computer
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Conrming Access Point Compatibility
Conrm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
standards in “Camera” (
=
210).
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS,
=
142) or not (
=
144). For
non-WPS access points, check the following information.
Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also
called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only)
On a computer running Windows, congure the following settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
z For instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
2
Congure the setting.
z Click in the following order: [Start] menu
► [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ►
[CameraWindow] ► [Wi-Fi connection
setup].
z In the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and congure the
setting.
The following Windows settings are congured when you run the
utility in step 2.
- Turn on media streaming.
This will enable the camera to see (nd) the computer to access
via Wi-Fi.
- Turn on network discovery.
This will enable the computer to see (nd) the camera.
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other
automatically.
Some security software may prevent you from completing the
settings as described here. Check the settings of your security
software.
142
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
3
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
4
Choose [Add a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
5
Choose [WPS Connection].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [WPS Connection], and
then press the [ ] button.
6
Choose [PBC Method].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [PBC Method], and then
press the [ ] button.
7
Establish the connection.
z On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
z On the camera, press the [
] button to
go to the next step.
z The camera connects to the access point
and lists devices connected to it on the
[Select a Device] screen.
For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access
points”.
If you use MAC address ltering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can
check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU (
=
31)
► [
4] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Check MAC Address].
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Conguration Method or PIN
Method for settings on a WPS supported device.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
z For instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
] button.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons or
turn the [ ] dial to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
143
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
11
Import images.
z Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
z Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
z Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete.
z Use Digital Photo Professional to view
images you save to a computer. To view
movies, use preinstalled or commonly
available software compatible with
movies recorded by the camera.
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ►
[Off].
You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 2 (
=
157).
When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen
is blank.
Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
If you chose [PIN Method] in step 6, a PIN code will be displayed
on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point.
Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further
details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.
8
Choose the target device.
z Choose the target device name (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
9
Install a driver (rst Windows
connection only).
z When this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
z Double-click the connected camera icon.
z
Driver installation will begin.
z After driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
10
Display CameraWindow.
z Windows: Access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
z Mac OS: CameraWindow is automatically
displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is
established between the camera and
computer.
144
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
If no access points are detected even after you choose [Refresh]
in step 2 to update the list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2
to complete access point settings manually. Follow on-screen
instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password.
When you use an access point that you have already connected
to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the
password in step 3. To use the same password, choose [Next]
(either press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial) and press
the [
] button.
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
142).
To connect to a device via an access point, conrm that the target
device is already connected to the access point, and then follow the
procedure from step 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
142).
To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow
the procedure in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
142)
from step 5 or the procedure in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(
=
144) from step 2.
Connecting to Listed Access Points
1
View the listed access points.
z View the listed networks (access points)
as described in steps 1 – 4 of “Using
WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
142).
2
Choose an access point.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a network (access point),
and then press the [ ] button.
3
Enter the access point password.
z Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
(
=
32).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Next], and then press the
[ ] button.
4
Choose [Auto].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Auto], and then press the
[ ] button.
z To save images to a connected computer,
follow the procedure from step 8 in
“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
142).
145
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY by adding CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera. Note
that you will need to enter an email address used on your computer or
smartphone to receive a notication message for completing linkage
settings.
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
z Press the [
] button.
z If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, touch [OK].
2
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Accept the agreement to enter an
email address.
z Read the agreement displayed and touch
[I Agree].
Sending Images to a Registered Web
Service
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that
you want to use.
A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.
com/cig/).
You must have an account with Web services other than CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check
the websites for each Web service you want to register.
Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY also provides user guides for
downloading.
146
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Access the page in the notication
message and complete camera link
settings.
z From a computer or smartphone,
access the page linked in the notication
message.
z Follow the instructions to complete the
settings on the camera link settings page.
9
Complete CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
settings on the camera.
z Touch [ ].
z [
] (
=
153) and CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations.
z You can add other Web services,
as needed. In this case, follow the
instructions from step 2 in “Registering
Other Web Services” (
=
147).
Make sure initially that your computer or smartphone mail
application is not congured to block email from relevant domains,
which may prevent you from receiving the notication message.
You can also change the camera nickname on the screen in
step 1 (
=
157).
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the menu. Press
the [
][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and then
congure the setting.
Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(
=
122), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
4
Establish a connection with an
access point.
z Connect to the access point as described
in steps 5 – 7 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (
=
142) or in steps 2 – 4
in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(
=
144).
5
Enter your email address.
z Once the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point, a
screen is displayed for entering an email
address.
z Enter your email address and touch
[Next].
6
Enter a four-digit number.
z Enter a four-digit number of your choice
and touch [Next].
z You will need this four-digit number later
when setting up linkage with CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY in step 8.
7
Check for the notication message.
z Once information has been sent to
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, you will
receive a notication message at the
email address entered in step 5.
z Touch [OK] on the next screen, which
indicates that notication has been sent.
z [
] now changes to [ ].
147
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Uploading Images to Web Services
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
z Press the [
] button.
2
Choose the destination.
z Touch the icon of the Web service to
connect to.
z If multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, touch the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen displayed.
3
Send an image.
z Drag images left or right to choose an
image to send, and then touch [Send this
image].
z When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, and touch [I Agree].
z Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
z After the image is sent, touch [OK] on the
screen displayed to return to the playback
screen.
Registering Other Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera.
1
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and access the camera link settings
page.
z From a computer or smartphone, access
http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
2
Congure the Web service you want
to use.
z Follow the instructions displayed on the
smartphone or computer to set up the
Web service.
3
Choose [ ].
z In Playback mode, press the [ ] button.
z Drag left or right on the screen, and then
touch [
].
z The Web service settings are now
updated.
If any congured settings change, follow these steps again to
update the camera settings.
148
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Printing Images Wirelessly from a
Connected Printer
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
139).
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using
the Wi-Fi Menu” (
=
137).
2
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
z The camera’s SSID is displayed.
Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and
add comments before sending (
=
150).
To view images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on a
smartphone, try the dedicated Canon Online Photo Album app.
Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for
iPhones or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from
Google Play.
149
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Sending Images to Another Camera
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as
follows.
Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be
connected to wirelessly. You cannot connect to a Canon-brand camera
that does not have a Wi-Fi function, even if it supports Eye-Fi cards.
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
z Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using
the Wi-Fi Menu” (
=
137).
2
Choose [ ].
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Add a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
z Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
too.
z Camera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
4
Connect the printer to the network.
z In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu, choose
the SSID (network name) displayed on the
camera to establish a connection.
5
Choose the printer.
z Choose the printer name (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
6
Choose an image to print.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
z Press the [
] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Print], and then press the [ ] button.
z For detailed printing instructions, see
“Printing Images” (
=
178).
z To end the connection, press the [
]
button, choose [OK] on the conrmation
screen (either press the [ ][ ] buttons
or turn the [ ] dial), and then press the
[ ] button.
Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ► [Off].
To use another access point, follow steps 3 – 4 in “Using Another
Access Point” (
=
139).
150
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Image Sending Options
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
recording pixel setting (size) before sending. Some Web services also
enable you to annotate the images you send.
Sending Multiple Images
1
Choose [Select and send].
z On the image transfer screen, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and
send], and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a selection method.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose a selection method.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
z Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
150), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
4
Send an image.
z Turn the [ ] dial to choose an image to
send, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send this image], and then press the [ ]
button.
z Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
z [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
z To end the connection, press the
[
] button, choose [OK] on the
conrmation screen (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
31) ► [ 4] tab ► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Target History] ►
[Off].
You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
150,
=
152).
Once a connection destination is assigned in Touch Actions
(
=
122), you can automatically reconnect to a previous
destination simply by dragging across the screen with the
assigned gesture.
151
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
2
Choose images.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
116) to specify images.
z To include movies, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Incl.
Movies], and then press the [ ] button to
mark the option as selected ( ).
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Send the images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
Sending Favorite Images
Send only images tagged as favorites (
=
121).
1
Choose [Favorite Images].
z Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
150), choose [Favorite
Images] and press the [ ] button.
z An image selection screen for favorites is
displayed. If you prefer not to include an
image, choose the image and press the
[
] button to remove [ ].
z After you nish choosing images, press
the [
] button, choose [OK], and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Send the images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [ ]
button. [ ] is displayed.
z To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
z After you nish choosing images, press
the [
] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Send the images.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Send], and then press the
[ ] button.
You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom
lever twice toward [
] to access single-image display and then
pressing the [
][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
z Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
150), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
152
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels
(Image Size)
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose
the recording pixel setting (image size) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
Choosing [
] will resize images that are larger than the selected size
before sending.
Movies cannot be resized.
Image size can also be congured in MENU (
=
31) ► [ 4] tab
► [Wi-Fi Settings] ► [Resize for Sending].
Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send
to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of
characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the
Web service.
1
Access the screen for adding
comments.
z On the image transfer screen, choose
[ ] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Add a comment (=
32).
3
Send the image.
When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The
same comment is added to all images sent together.
In step 1, [Favorite Images] is not available unless you have
tagged images as favorites.
Notes on Sending Images
Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you
can send.
For movies that you do not compress (
=
128), a separate,
compressed le is sent instead of the original le. Note that this may
delay transmission, and the le cannot be sent unless there is enough
space for it on the memory card.
When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the
smartphone user manual.
On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
icons.
[
] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
153
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
3
Assign [ ] to the [ ] button (only
when sending images by pressing
the [ ] button).
z Clear the [ ] button setting if a
smartphone is already assigned to the
button (
=
136).
z Press the [
] button to access the mobile
connection screen, choose [ ] (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button.
Preparing the Computer
Install and congure the software on the destination computer.
1
Install the software.
z Install the software on a computer
connected to the Internet (
=
140).
2
Register the camera.
z Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
z Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [
], and
then click [Add new camera].
z A list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera from which images are to be
sent.
z Once the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to [
].
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync)
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Initial Preparations
Preparing the Camera
Register [ ] as the destination. You can also assign [ ] to the [ ] button,
so that you can simply press the [ ] button to send any unsent images on
the memory card to a computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
1
Add [ ] as a destination.
z Add [ ] as a destination, as described in
“Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY”
(
=
145).
z To include a Web service as the
destination, log in to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (
=
145), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings
screen, and choose the destination
Web service in Image Sync settings.
For details, refer to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY Help.
2
Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ 4] tab (
=
31).
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [Stills/Movies].
154
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Even if images were imported to the computer through a different
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so
the computer must be connected to the Internet.
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on a Smartphone
By installing the Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA) app, you can
use your smartphone to view and download images sent via Image Sync
while they are stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
server.
In preparation, enable smartphone access as follows.
Make sure you have completed the settings described in “Preparing
the Computer” (
=
153).
Download and install the Canon Online Photo Album app for iPhones
or iPads from the App Store or for Android devices from Google Play.
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (
=
145), select your camera
model, access the Web service settings screen, and enable viewing
and downloading from a smartphone in the Image Sync settings. For
details, refer to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help.
Once images stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server have been deleted, they can no longer be
viewed.
Images you sent before enabling smartphone viewing and
downloading in Image Sync settings cannot be accessed this way.
For Canon Online Photo Album instructions, refer to Canon
Online Photo Album Help.
Sending Images
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
1
Send images.
z If you have already assigned [ ] to the
[ ] button, press the [ ] button.
z If you have not assigned the button
this way, choose [
] as described in
steps 1 – 2 in “Uploading Images to Web
Services” (
=
147).
z Sent images are labeled with a [
] icon.
2
Save the images to the computer.
z Images are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
z Images are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery
pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
=
169).
155
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Shooting Remotely
As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to
shoot remotely.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
z Turn the mode dial to choose [ ], [ ],
[ ], [ ], or [ ] as the mode.
2
Secure the camera.
z Once remote shooting begins, the
camera lens will come out. Lens motion
from zooming may also move the camera
out of position. Keep the camera still by
mounting it on a tripod or taking other
measures.
3
Connect the camera and
smartphone (=
136, =
137).
z In the privacy settings, choose [Yes].
4
Choose remote shooting.
z In Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose remote shooting.
z The camera lens will come out. Keep
your ngers away from the lens, and
make sure no objects will obstruct it.
z Once the camera is ready for remote
shooting, a live image from the camera
will be displayed on the smartphone.
z At this time, a message is displayed
on the camera, and all operations
except pressing the ON/OFF button are
disabled.
5
Shoot.
z Use the smartphone to shoot.
Using a Smartphone to View Camera
Images and Control the Camera
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Camera
Connect.
Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone
Geotag images on the camera (
=
155)
Shoot remotely (
=
155)
Privacy settings must be congured in advance to allow image
viewing on the smartphone (
=
136,
=
137,
=
156).
Geotagging Images on the Camera
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated Camera
Connect application can be added to images on the camera. Images are
tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.
Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home
time zone are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and
Time” (
=
20). Also follow the steps in “World Clock” (
=
162)
to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones.
Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
156
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Editing Connection Information
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
a device to edit.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
] button.
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose the icon of a
device to edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Choose [Edit a Device].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Edit a Device], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose the device to edit.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the device to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
4
Choose the item to edit.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose the item to edit, and then
press the [ ] button.
z The items you can change depend on the
device or service.
[ ] mode is used for shooting in modes other than [ ], [ ],
[
], [ ], and [ ]. However, some Quick Set and MENU
settings you have congured in advance may be changed
automatically.
Movie shooting is not available.
Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connection environment will not affect recorded images.
Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and import images from the camera.
157
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Changing the Camera Nickname
Change the camera nickname (displayed on connected devices) as
desired.
1
Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ 4] tab (
=
31).
2
Choose [Change Device Nickname].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial to choose [Change Device
Nickname], and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Change the nickname.
z Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard (
=
32), and then enter a
nickname.
A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [
] button and enter a different
nickname.
You can also change the nickname from the [Device Nickname]
screen displayed when you rst use Wi-Fi. In this case, select the
text box, press the [
] button to access the keyboard, and then
enter a new nickname.
Congurable Items
Connection
Web
Services
[Change Device Nickname]
(
=
157)
O O O O
[View Settings] (
=
136)
O
[Erase Connection Info] (
=
157)
O O O O
O
: Congurable
: Not congurable
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
z Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
156), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the [ ]
button.
z Select the input eld and press the [
]
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
enter a new nickname (
=
32).
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
z Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
156), choose [Erase
Connection Info] and press the [ ]
button.
z After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
z The connection information will be
erased.
158
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be
sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
1
Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].
z Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ 4] tab (
=
31).
2
Choose [Reset Settings].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Reset Settings], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Restore the default settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose
[Reset All] on the [
4] tab (
=
165).
159
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
MENU (
=
31) settings on the [ 1], [ 2], [ 3], and [ 4] tabs can be
congured. Customize commonly used functions as desired, for greater
convenience.
Date-Based Image Storage
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
z Choose [Create Folder] on the [
1] tab,
and then choose [Daily].
z Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
File Numbering
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns le numbers.
z Choose [File Numbering] on the [
1] tab,
and then choose an option.
Continuous
Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th
shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory
cards.
Auto Reset
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch
memory cards, or when a new folder is created.
Setting Menu
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for
greater convenience
160
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Low-Level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-
level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
z On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting
Memory Cards” (
=
160), press the
[ ] button to choose [Low Level
Format]. A [ ] icon is displayed.
z Follow step 2 in “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
160) to continue with the
formatting process.
Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
160), because data is erased from all storage regions
of the memory card.
You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
Changing the Video System
Set the video system of any television used for display. This setting
determines the image quality (frame rate) available for movies.
z Choose [Video system] on the [
1] tab,
and then choose an option.
Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
use an empty (or formatted,
=
160) memory card.
Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device,
you should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy
images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back
them up.
1
Access the [Format] screen.
z Choose [Format] on the [ 1] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [OK].
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z The memory card is now formatted.
Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes le
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by
physically destroying cards.
The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
161
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Switching the Color of Screen Information
Still Images
Movies
Information displayed on the screen and menus can be changed to a color
suitable for shooting under low-light conditions. Enabling this setting is
useful in modes such as [ ] (
=
67).
z Choose [Night Display] on the [
2] tab,
and then choose [On] (
=
31).
z To restore the original display, choose
[Off].
You can also return the setting to [Off] by holding down the
[
] button for at least one second on the shooting screen or
in Playback mode during single-image display.
Using Eco Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption.
1
Congure the setting.
z Choose [Eco Mode] on the [ 2] tab, and
then choose [On].
z [
] is now shown on the shooting
screen (
=
191).
z The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
Electronic Level Calibration
Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the
camera.
For greater calibration accuracy, display grid lines (
=
100) to help you
level the camera in advance.
1
Make sure the camera is level.
z Place the camera on a at surface, such
as a table.
2
Calibrate the electronic level.
z Choose [Electronic Level] on the [ 1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z To adjust left/right tilt, choose [Horizontal
Roll Calibration], and to adjust forward/
backward tilt, choose [Vertical Pitch
Calibration], followed by the [
] button. A
conrmation message is displayed.
z Choose [OK], and then press the [
]
button.
Resetting the Electronic Level
Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows. Note that this is
not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level.
z Choose [Electronic Level] on the [
1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose [Reset], and then press the [
]
button.
z Choose [OK], and then press the [
]
button.
162
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button
for at least one second when the shooting screen is displayed
or when in single-image display. (This will override the [Disp.
Brightness] setting on the [
2] tab.) To restore the original
brightness, press and hold the [
] button again for at least
one second or restart the camera.
World Clock
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (
=
20).
1
Specify your destination.
z Choose [Time Zone] on the [ 2] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose the
destination.
z To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [
] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons or turning the [ ] dial,
and then choose [ ] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons.
z Press the [
] button.
2
Shoot.
z
To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the lens
is still out, press the shutter button halfway.
Power-Saving Adjustment
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto
Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (
=
27).
z Choose [Power Saving] on the [
2] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose an item, press the [
] button,
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to congure the setting.
To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power
Down] to [Off].
These power-saving functions are not available when you have
set Eco mode (
=
161) to [On].
Screen Brightness
Screen and viewnder brightness can be set separately. Before
adjustment, make sure the display to adjust is activated.
z Choose [Disp. Brightness] on the [
2]
tab, press the [ ] button, and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
adjust the brightness.
163
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
z Choose [Language
] on the [ 3] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons or turn
the [ ] dial to choose a language, and
then press the [ ] button.
You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [
] button and immediately pressing
the [
] button.
Silencing Camera Operations
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
z Choose [Mute] on the [
3] tab, and then
choose [On].
Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ]
button as you turn the camera on.
Sound is not played during movies (
=
105) if you mute camera
sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [
] button or
drag up across the screen. Adjust volume as needed by pressing
the [
][ ] buttons or by dragging up or down quickly.
2
Switch to the destination time zone.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
z [
] is now shown on the shooting screen
(
=
191).
Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (
=
21) will
automatically update your [
Home] time and date.
Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
z Choose [Date/Time] on the [
2] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then adjust the setting, either
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or turning
the [ ] dial.
Lens Retraction Timing
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
the [ ] button in Shooting mode (
=
26). To have the lens retracted
immediately after you press the [ ] button, set the retraction timing to
[0 sec.].
z Choose [Lens Retraction] on the [
2] tab,
and then choose [0 sec.].
164
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Hiding Hints and Tips
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose Quick Set menu
(
=
30) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.
z Choose [Hints & Tips] on the [
3] tab,
and then choose [Off].
Adjusting the Touch-Screen Panel
Sensitivity of the touch-screen panel can be increased to respond to a
lighter touch, or you can disable touch control.
z Choose [
4] tab ► [Touch Operation],
and then choose the desired option.
z To increase touch-screen panel
sensitivity, choose [Sensitive], and to
disable touch control, choose [Disable].
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar (
=
35), the
MF indicator (
=
85), and elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as needed.
z Choose [Units] on the [
4] tab, and then
choose [ft/in].
Adjusting the Volume
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
z Choose [Volume] on the [
3] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
z Choose an item, and then press the
[
][ ] buttons to adjust the volume.
Customizing Sounds
Customize camera operating sounds as follows.
z Choose [Sound Options] on the [
3] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Choose an item, and then press the
[
][ ] buttons to change the sound.
The shutter sound in digest movies recorded in [ ] mode
(
=
37) cannot be changed.
Start-Up Screen
Customize the start-up screen shown after you turn the camera on as
follows.
z Choose [Start-up Image] on the [
1] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
165
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Deleting All Copyright Information
You can delete both the author’s name and copyright details at the same
time as follows.
z Follow the steps in “Setting Copyright
Information to Record in Images”
(
=
165) and choose [Delete Copyright
Info].
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted.
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted.
[
4] tab setting [Wi-Fi Settings] (
=
133)
[
4] tab setting [Mobile Device Connect Button] (
=
136)
Restoring Default Camera Settings
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
1
Access the [Reset All] screen.
z Choose [Reset All] on the [ 4] tab, and
then press the [ ] button.
2
Restore default settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Default settings are now restored.
Checking Certication Logos
Some logos for certication requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen. Other certication logos are printed in this guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
z Choose [Certication Logo Display] on
the [
4] tab, and then press the [ ]
button.
Setting Copyright Information to Record in
Images
To record the author’s name and copyright details in images, set this
information beforehand as follows.
z Choose [Copyright Info] on the [
4] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Enter Author’s Name] or
[Enter Copyright Details]. Press the [ ]
button to access the keyboard, and enter
the name (
=
32).
z Press the [
] button. When [Accept
changes?] is displayed, choose [Yes]
(either press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the
[ ] dial), and then press the [ ] button.
z The information set here will now be
recorded in images.
To check the information entered, choose [Display Copyright Info]
on the screen above, and then press the [
] button.
166
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
The following functions are not restored to default settings.
- Information registered using Face ID (
=
45)
- [
1] tab setting [Video system] (
=
160)
- [
2] tab settings [Time Zone] (
=
162), [Date/Time] (
=
163),
and [
3] tab setting [Language ] (
=
163)
- Custom white balance data you have recorded (
=
82)
- Shooting Mode
- Exposure compensation (
=
78) setting
- Movie mode (
=
73)
- Wi-Fi settings (
=
133)
- Calibrated value for the electronic level (
=
161)
- Copyright information (
=
165)
167
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as re, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please
note that any repairs your Canon product may require as a result of such
malfunction are not covered under warranty and will incur a fee.
Accessories
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon
accessories and other compatible accessories sold
separately
168
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
System Map
*1 Also available for purchase separately.
*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-600PCU).
*3 Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.).
*4 The following accessories are also supported: Speedlite 580EX, 430EX, 270EX,
and 220EX, Speedlite Transmitter ST-E3-RT, Speedlite Bracket SB-E2, and Off-
Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.
Neck Strap Strap Adapter
Battery Pack
NB-13L*
1
Battery Charger
CB-2LH/CB-2LHE*
1
USB Cable (camera end: Micro-B)*
2
Memory Card Card Reader
Computer
TV/Video
System
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-DC110
Included Accessories
Power
Cables
HDMI Cable
(camera end: Type D)*
3
Flash Units
PictBridge-Compatible Printers
Connect
Station CS100
Speedlite*
4
600EX-RT, 600EX, 580EX II,
430EX II, 320EX, 270EX II
High-Power Flash
HF-DC2
Remote Switch
RS-60E3
Other Accessories
Compact Power
Adapter
CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
169
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Compact Power Adapter
CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
z Insert the included battery pack into the
camera for charging. Interface Cable
IFC-600PCU (sold separately) is required
to connect the adapter to the camera.
Flash Units
High-Power Flash HF-DC2
z External ash for illuminating subjects
that are out of range of the built-in ash.
High-Power Flash HF-DC1 can also be
used.
Speedlite 600EX-RT/600EX/
580EX II/430EX II/320EX/270EX II
z Shoe-mounted ash unit that enables
many styles of ash photography.
Speedlite 580EX, 430EX, 270EX, and
220EX are also supported.
Speedlite Bracket SB-E2
z Prevents unnatural shadows next to
subjects during vertical shooting. Includes
Off-Camera Shoe Cord OC-E3.
Speedlite Transmitter ST-E2/ST-E3-RT
z Enables wireless control of slave
Speedlite ash units (except Speedlite
220EX/270EX).
High-Power Flash units cannot be used in [ ], [ ], or [ ]
shooting mode when [Flash Mode] is set to [Manual].
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that
availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
available.
Power Supplies
Battery Pack NB-13L
z Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
z Charger for Battery Pack NB-13L
The message [Battery communication error] is displayed if you
use a non-genuine Canon battery pack, and user response is
required. Note that Canon shall not be liable for any damages
resulting from accidents, such as malfunction or re, that occur
due to use of non-genuine Canon battery packs.
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC110
z For powering the camera using
household power. Recommended when
using the camera over extended periods,
or when connecting the camera to a
printer or computer. Cannot be used to
charge the battery pack in the camera.
The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with
100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
170
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Using Optional Accessories
Playback on a TV
Still Images
Movies
You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV
with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m / 8.2 ft.,
with a Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at an image
quality of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], or
[ ] can be viewed in high denition.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
1
Make sure the camera and TV are
off.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
z On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
z On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
3
Turn the TV on and switch to
external input.
z Switch the TV input to the external input
you connected the cable to in step 2.
Other Accessories
Interface Cable IFC-600PCU
z For connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
Remote Switch RS-60E3
z Enables remote shutter button operation
(pressing the button halfway or all the
way down).
Printers
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
z Even without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
Photo and Movie Storage
Connect Station CS100
A media hub for storing camera images,
viewing on a connected TV, printing
wirelessly on a Wi-Fi-compatible printer,
sharing over the Internet, and more.
171
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Powering the Camera with Household Power
Still Images
Movies
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC110 (sold separately)
eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.
1
Make sure the camera is off.
2
Open the cover.
z Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Your Memory Card” (
=
19)
to open the memory card/battery cover,
and then open the coupler cable port
cover as shown.
3
Insert the coupler.
z Holding the coupler with the terminals (1)
facing as shown, insert the coupler just
as you would a battery pack (following
step 2 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and
Your Memory Card” (
=
19)).
z Make sure the coupler cable passes
through the port (1).
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
1
)
4
Turn the camera on.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
z When nished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
Touch-screen operations are not supported while the camera is
connected to a television.
Some information may not be available when using a TV as the
display (
=
192).
Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is
connected to an HDTV.
When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot
while previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot,
follow the same steps as when using the camera screen.
However, AF-Point Zoom (
=
53), MF-Point Zoom (
=
85),
MF Peaking (
=
86) and Night Display (
=
161) are not
available.
172
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Inserting and Charging the Battery Pack
Charge the battery pack by using the supplied battery pack with an
optional Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E or Interface Cable
IFC-600PCU.
1
Insert the battery pack.
z Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Your Memory Card” (
=
19)
to open the cover.
z Insert the battery pack as described in
step 2 of “Inserting the Battery Pack and
Your Memory Card” (
=
19).
z Follow step 3 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Your Memory Card” (
=
19)
to close the cover.
2
Connect the compact power adapter
to the camera.
z With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). Hold the smaller plug of the
interface cable (sold separately) facing
as shown and insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal (2).
z Insert the larger plug of the interface
cable into the compact power adapter.
(
1
)
(
2
)
4
Close the cover.
z Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide the switch, until it clicks into the
closed position (2).
5
Connect the power cord.
z Insert one end of the power cord into the
compact power adapter, and then plug
the other end into a power outlet.
z
Turn the camera on and use it as desired.
z
When nished, turn the camera off and
unplug the power cord from the outlet.
Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while
the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the
camera.
Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing
so could result in malfunction or damage to the product.
(
1
)
(
2
)
173
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (
=
211).
You can view images even while the battery is charging, by
turning the camera on and entering Playback mode (
=
24).
However, you cannot shoot while the battery is charging.
Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Using a Computer to Charge the Battery
You can also charge the battery pack by inserting the larger plug of the
interface cable into a computers USB terminal in step 2 of “Inserting and
Charging the Battery Pack” (
=
172). For details about USB connections
on the computer, refer to the computer user manual.
Charging is not possible when the camera is off.
With some computers, battery charging may require the memory
card to be in the camera. Insert the memory card in the camera
(
=
19) before connecting the cable to the computer’s USB port.
3
Charge the battery pack.
z CA-DC30: Flip out the plug (1) and plug
the compact power adapter into a power
outlet (2).
z CA-DC30E: Plug the power cord into the
compact power adapter, then plug the
other end into a power outlet.
z Charging begins and the USB charge
lamp lights up.
z The lamp turns off when charging
nishes.
z Remove the compact power adapter from
the power outlet and the interface cable
from the camera.
To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
When charging a different battery pack, be sure rst to disconnect
the interface cable from the camera and then insert another
battery pack for charging.
174
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Speedlite EX Series
Still Images
Movies
These optional ash units can provide bright lighting and meet a variety of
ash photography needs.
1
Attach the ash.
z Make sure the camera is off, and then
attach the ash unit to the hot shoe.
2
Turn the ash on, and then turn the
camera on.
z A red [ ] icon is now displayed.
z The ash pilot lamp will light up when the
ash is ready.
3
Choose shooting mode [ ], [ ],
[ ], or [ ].
z Flash settings can only be congured in
these modes. In other modes, the ash
is adjusted and red automatically, as
needed.
4
Congure the external ash.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Control] on the [ 5] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Options already set on the ash itself are
displayed.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then set the
desired option.
z Available items vary depending on the
shooting mode and the ash attached
(
=
175).
Using a Remote Switch (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
An optional Remote Switch RS-60E3 can be used to avoid camera shake
that may otherwise occur when pressing the shutter button directly. This
optional accessory is convenient when shooting at slow shutter speeds.
1
Connect the remote switch.
z Make sure the camera is off.
z Open the terminal cover and insert the
remote switch plug.
2
Shoot.
z To shoot, press the release button on the
remote switch.
Using an External Flash (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
More sophisticated ash photography is possible with an optional
Speedlite EX series ash. For movie shooting using an LED light, the
optional Speedlite 320EX ash is available.
This camera does not support some Speedlite EX series
functions.
Non-EX series Canon ash units may not re correctly or may not
re at all, in some cases.
Use of non-Canon ash units (especially high-voltage ash units)
or ash accessories may prevent normal camera operation and
may damage the camera.
Also refer to the Speedlite EX series manual for additional
information.
175
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Camera Settings Available with an External Flash
(Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
The following items are available in [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] mode. In
other shooting modes, only [Red-Eye Lamp] can be congured. (With
autoash control, the ash always res.) However, external ash units do
not re in modes that the built-in ash does not re (
=
193).
Item Options
Shooting Mode
Flash Mode
Auto*
1
O O O
O
Manual*
2
O O O O
Flash Exp.
Comp*
3
–3 to +3
O O O O
Flash Output*
4
1/128*
5
– 1/1
(in 1/3-stop increments)
O O O O
Wireless Func.*
6
Off/Optical/Radio
O O O O
Red-Eye Lamp On/Off
O O O O
Safety FE*
7
On
O O O
Off
O O O O
Clear Flash Settings*
8
O O O O
Settings for the built-in ash cannot be congured while a
Speedlite EX series ash is attached, because that setting screen
is no longer accessible.
You can also access the setting screen by pressing the [
] button
for at least one second.
600EX-RT/580EX II only: [Flash Control] is not available if the
external ash has been set up for stroboscopic ash.
320EX only: Auto LED lighting is only available in low-light movie
recording or in Movie mode. In this case, the [
] icon is shown.
Using Speedlite Bracket SB-E2 (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
z Using the optional Speedlite Bracket
SB-E2 can help prevent unnatural
shadows next to subjects during vertical
shooting.
z To keep the LCD screen out of the way
of the bracket, use the screen closed and
facing outward.
176
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Using the Software
To utilize the features of the following software, download the software
from the Canon website and install it on your computer.
CameraWindow
- Import images to your computer
Image Transfer Utility
- Set up Image Sync (
=
153) and receive images
Map Utility
- Use a map to view GPS information that has been added to images
Digital Photo Professional
- Browse, process and edit RAW images
To view and edit movies on a computer, use preinstalled or
commonly available software compatible with movies recorded by
the camera.
Image Transfer Utility can also be downloaded from the Image
Sync settings page of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Computer Connections via a Cable
Checking Your Computer Environment
The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed
system requirements and compatibility information, including support in
new operating systems, visit the Canon website.
Windows 8/8.1
Windows 7 SP1
Mac OS X 10.10
Mac OS X 10.9
*1 E-TTL mode is used for the ash.
*2 M mode is used for the ash.
In [
] shooting mode, E-TTL mode is also available for the ash. In this case,
when the ash res, ash exposure compensation set on the ash is applied to
the ash output level set on the camera.
*3 Can be congured only when [Flash Mode] is [Auto] and ash exposure
compensation set on the ash is [+0]. When you adjust ash exposure
compensation on 600EX-RT, 600EX, 580EX II, or 430EX II Speedlites, the
camera display will be updated accordingly.
*4 Can be congured when [Flash Mode] is [Manual]. Linked to settings on the
ash unit.
*5 1/64 for Speedlite 430EX II/430EX/320EX/270EX II/270EX.
*6 Congure other options on the ash unit itself. Available with Speedlite
580EX II/600EX-RT/600EX/90EX. When this item is not set to [Off], [Shutter
Sync.] cannot be set to [2nd-curtain]. (If [Shutter Sync.] is set to [2nd-curtain], it
will be changed to [1st-curtain].)
*7 Can only be congured when [Flash Mode] is [Auto].
*8 Restores all default settings. You can also restore defaults for [Safety FE] and
[Red-Eye Lamp] by using [Reset All] on the [
4] tab on the camera (
=
165).
In [ ] shooting mode, icons representing Smiling, Sleeping,
Babies (Smiling), Babies (Sleeping), and Children shooting
scenes determined by the camera are not displayed, and the
camera does not shoot continuously (
=
40).
177
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
z Windows: Follow the steps introduced
below.
z In the screen that is displayed, click the
change program link of [
].
z Choose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
z Double-click [
].
3
Save the images to the computer.
z Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
z Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
z After images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the [
] button to
turn the camera off, and unplug the cable.
z To view images you save to a computer,
use preinstalled or commonly available
software compatible with images
captured by the camera.
When sending images to a computer via Wi-Fi, check the system
requirements in “Checking Your Computer Environment” (
=
140).
Installing the Software
For software installation instructions, see “Installing the Software”
(
=
140).
Saving Images to a Computer
Using a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B), you can
connect the camera to the computer and save images to the computer.
1
Connect the camera to the
computer.
z With the camera turned off, open the
cover. With the smaller plug of the cable
in the orientation shown, insert the plug
fully into the camera terminal.
z Connect the larger cable plug to the
computer. For details on computer
connections, refer to the computer user
manual.
2
Turn the camera on to access
CameraWindow.
z Press the [ ] button.
z Mac OS: CameraWindow is displayed
when a connection is established
between the camera and computer.
178
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Printing Images
Still Images
Movies
Print your shots and congure a variety of settings used for your printer
or photo printing services by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-
compatible printer with a cable.
A Canon SELPHY CP printer is used in this example of PictBridge
printing. Also refer to your printer user manual.
Easy Print
Still Images
Movies
Print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible
printer with a USB cable (sold separately; camera end: Micro-B).
1
Make sure the camera and printer
are off.
2
Connect the camera to the printer.
z Open the terminal cover. Holding the
smaller cable plug in the orientation
shown, insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal.
z Connect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
3
Turn the printer on.
Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ]
icon in the taskbar.
Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
- RAW images (or JPEG images recorded with RAW images)
may not be saved.
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version, the
software in use, or image le sizes.
179
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
z Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(
=
178) to access this screen.
2
Congure the settings.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose an option (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button to return to the
printing screen.
Default Matches current printer settings.
Date Prints images with the date added.
File No. Prints images with the le number added.
Both
Prints images with both the date and le
number added.
Off
Default Matches current printer settings.
Off
On
Uses information from the time of shooting to
print under optimal settings.
Red-Eye 1 Corrects red-eye.
No. of
Copies
Choose the number of copies to print.
Cropping
Specify a desired image area to print (
=
180).
Paper
Settings
Specify the paper size, layout, and other details
(
=
180).
4
Turn the camera on.
z Press the [ ] button.
5
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image.
6
Access the printing screen.
z Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and
press the [ ] button again.
7
Print the image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print], and then press the
[ ] button.
z Printing now begins.
z To print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 5 after
printing is nished.
z When you are nished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
see “Printers” (
=
170).
RAW images cannot be printed.
180
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Paper Settings].
z After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (
=
179) to access the printing
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a paper size.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [
] button.
3
Choose a type of paper.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Choose a layout.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an option.
z When choosing [N-up], press the [
]
button. On the next screen, choose the
number of images per sheet (either press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial),
and then press the [ ] button.
5
Print the image.
Cropping Images before Printing
Still Images
Movies
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
1
Choose [Cropping].
z After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (
=
179) to access the printing
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
[ ] button.
z A cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
2
Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
z To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
z To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
z To rotate the frame, turn the [
] dial.
z When nished, press the [
] button.
3
Print the image.
z Follow step 7 in “Easy Print” (
=
178)
to print.
Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
181
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Printing Movie Scenes
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
z Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(
=
178) to choose a movie. The screen
at left is displayed.
2
Choose a printing method.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button. On the
next screen, choose an option (either
press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial), and then press the [ ] button to
return to the printing screen.
3
Print the image.
Movie Printing Options
Single Prints the current scene as a still image.
Sequence
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single
sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number, le
number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting [Caption]
to [On].
To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],
and then press the [
] button again.
After displaying a scene to print as described in steps 2 – 5 of
“Viewing” (
=
105), you can also access the screen in step 1
here by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ] in the movie
control panel and then pressing the [
] button.
Available Layout Options
Default Matches current printer settings.
Bordered Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet.
ID Photo
Prints images for identication purposes.
Only available for images with a recording pixel setting of L
and an aspect ratio of 3:2.
Fixed Size
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Printing ID Photos
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [ID Photo].
z
Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing Paper
Size and Layout before Printing” (
=
180),
choose [ID Photo] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose the long and short side length.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an item, and then press
the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose the length (either press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial), and
then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose the printing area.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Cropping], and then press
the [ ] button.
z Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
Printing” (
=
180) to choose the printing
area.
4
Print the image.
182
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
[
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers (sold separately).
The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/
Time] on the [
2] tab (
=
21).
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
z Press the [ ] button, choose [Print
settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Select Images & Qty.],
and then press the [ ] button (
=
31).
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
z
You can now specify the number of copies.
z If you specify index printing for the image,
it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To cancel
index printing for the image, press the [ ]
button again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
Batch printing (
=
183) and ordering prints from a photo development
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and congure relevant settings, such as the number of
copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will
conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
RAW images cannot be included in print list.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or le number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list.
z Press the [
] button, choose [Print
settings] on the [ 4] tab, and then press
the [ ] button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [Print Settings], and then
press the [ ] button. On the next screen,
choose and congure items as needed
(
=
31).
Print Type
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
Index
Smaller versions of multiple images are
printed per sheet.
Both
Both standard and index formats are printed.
Date
On Images are printed with the shooting date.
Off
File No.
On Images are printed with the le number.
Off
Clear DPOF
data
On
All image print list settings are cleared after
printing.
Off
183
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Clearing All Images from the Print List
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
182), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
z When images have been added to the
print list (
=
182 –
=
183), this screen
is displayed after you connect the camera
to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now],
and then simply press the [ ] button to
print the images in the print list.
z Any DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
3
Specify the number of prints.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to specify the number of prints (up
to 99).
z To set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat
steps 2 – 3.
z Printing quantity cannot be specied for
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
z When nished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Still Images
Movies
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
182), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
z Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
116) to specify images.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Still Images
Movies
z Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
182), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
184
Appendix
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Adding Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and using CameraWindow to import them to your
computer (
=
176), where they are copied to their own folder. This
is convenient when ordering printed photobooks online or printing
photobooks with your own printer.
Choosing a Selection Method
z Press the [ ] button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [ 4] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
[ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
Adding Images Individually
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select].
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
184), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
z Press the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
z [
] is displayed.
z To remove the image from the photobook,
press the [
] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
z Repeat this process to specify other
images.
z When nished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
184), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
z Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
184), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
z Press the [
][ ] buttons or turn the [ ]
dial to choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
185
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Troubleshooting
If you think there is a problem with the camera, rst check the following.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Power
Nothing happens when the ON/OFF button is pressed.
Conrm that the battery pack is charged (
=
18).
Conrm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (
=
19).
Conrm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (
=
19).
Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
The lens is not retracted.
Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the
cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (
=
19).
The battery pack is swollen.
Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from tting in the camera, contact a
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Display on a TV
Camera images look distorted or are not displayed on a TV (
=
170).
Appendix
Helpful information when using the camera
186
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Subjects in shots look too dark.
Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
91).
Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
78).
Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
78,
=
78).
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
35).
Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
78).
Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
78,
=
78).
Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Shots look too dark despite the ash ring (
=
38).
Shoot within ash range (
=
210).
Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (
=
92,
=
99).
Increase the ISO speed (
=
79).
Subjects in ash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
Shoot within ash range (
=
210).
Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
35).
Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (
=
92,
=
99).
White spots appear in ash shots.
This is caused by light from the ash reecting off dust or airborne particles.
Shots look grainy.
Lower the ISO speed (
=
79).
High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (
=
60).
Subjects are affected by red-eye.
Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (
=
56). The red-eye reduction lamp (
=
4)
will light up for ash shots. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
Edit images using red-eye correction (
=
126).
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
160).
Shooting settings or Quick Set menu settings are not available.
Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available
in Each Shooting Mode”, “Quick Set Menu”, and “Shooting Tab” (
=
193 –
=
199).
Shooting
Cannot shoot.
In Playback mode (
=
105), press the shutter button halfway (
=
27).
Strange display on the screen under low light (
=
29).
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
- The screen may icker and horizontal banding may appear under uorescent
or LED lighting.
Full-screen display is not available while shooting (
=
94).
[
] ashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting
is not possible (
=
38).
[
] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (
=
38).
Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (
=
54).
Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
91).
Increase the ISO speed (
=
79).
Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
the camera (
=
54).
Shots are out of focus.
Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
way down to shoot (
=
27).
Make sure subjects are within focusing range (
=
211).
Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (
=
55).
Conrm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (
=
87,
=
91).
Shots are blurry.
Blurring may occur more often when Touch Shutter is used to shoot, depending
on shooting conditions. Hold the camera still when shooting.
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter
button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
187
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Playback stops, or audio skips.
Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
camera (
=
160).
There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skip if computer performance is inadequate.
Sound is not played during movies.
Adjust the volume (
=
24) if you have activated [Mute] (
=
163) or the sound
in the movie is faint.
No sound is played for movies shot in [
] (
=
64), [ ] (
=
70), [ ]
(
=
75), or [ ] (
=
58) mode because audio is not recorded in these
modes.
Cannot access the Story Highlights home screen by pressing the [ ]
button.
Home screen display is not possible when connected to a printer. Disconnect the
camera from the printer.
Home screen display is not possible during Wi-Fi connections. End the Wi-Fi
connection.
A desired subject icon for an album is not displayed on the Story
Highlights home screen.
In simple information display mode (
=
107), choose an image that shows the
name of the person for the album before accessing the Story Highlights home
screen (
=
129).
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (
=
26).
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
- Press the [
] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [ ] button
down as you press the [
] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next
screen, press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.
The Babies or Children icon is not displayed.
The Babies and Children icons will not be displayed if the birthday is not set in
face information (
=
45). If the icons still are not displayed even when you set
the birthday, re-register face information (
=
46), or make sure that the date/
time is set correctly (
=
163).
Touch AF or Touch Shutter does not work.
Touch AF or Touch Shutter will not work if you touch the edges of the screen.
Touch closer to the center of the screen.
Shooting Movies
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time
(
=
160,
=
212).
[ ] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
The camera’s internal memory buffer lled up as the camera could not record to
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
160).
- Lower the image quality (
=
51).
- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (
=
212).
Zooming is not possible.
Zooming is not possible in [ ] mode (
=
67).
Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [
] (
=
64), [ ] (
=
75),
and [
] (
=
58) modes.
Subjects look distorted.
Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
malfunction.
Linear noise is recorded.
Linear noise may be recorded if lights or other sources of bright light are visible
on the shooting screen in an otherwise dark scene. Recompose the shot so that
the bright light is not visible on the shooting screen or nearby.
Playback
Playback is not possible.
Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
les or alter the folder structure.
188
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Cannot send images.
The destination device has insufcient storage space. Increase the storage space
on the destination device and resend the images.
The write-protect switch of the memory card in the destination camera is set to
the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position.
RAW images cannot be sent. For images captured in both JPEG and RAW
format, only the JPEG version is sent. However, RAW images can be sent using
Image Sync.
Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you
move or rename image les or folders on the computer that received images sent
using Image Sync via an access point (
=
153). Before moving or renaming
these image les or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
Cannot resize images for sending.
Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the recording pixel setting of their
original size.
Movies cannot be resized.
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to reduce
sending time (
=
152).
Movies may take a long time to send.
Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the
2.4 GHz band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [
]
is displayed.
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
No notication message is received on a computer or smartphone after
adding CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the camera.
Make sure the email address you entered is correct, and try adding the
destination again.
Check the email settings on the computer or smartphone. If they are congured to
block email from certain domains, you may not be able to receive the notication
message.
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
Reset the Wi-Fi settings (
=
158).
Wi-Fi
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [
] button.
The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and
try again.
In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during magnied display
or index display. Switch to single-image display and try again. Similarly, the
Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during group playback or ltered image display
according to specied conditions. Cancel group or ltered image playback.
The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,
computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
Cannot add a device/destination.
A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
unneeded connection information from the camera rst, and then add new
devices/destinations (
=
156).
Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (
=
145).
To add a smartphone, rst install the dedicated application Camera Connect on
your smartphone (
=
136).
To add a computer, rst install the software CameraWindow on your computer.
Also check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (
=
140,
=
141).
Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the
2.4 GHz band.
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Cannot connect to the access point.
Conrm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the
camera (
=
210). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to
specify a supported channel manually.
189
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Unidentied Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back
MOV/Cannot play back MP4
Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
Cannot magnify!/Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/
Cannot assign to category/Unselectable image./No identication
information
The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
Edit ID Info* (
=
113), Magnify* (
=
114), Rotate* (
=
120), Favorites
(
=
121), Edit* (
=
123), Print List* (
=
182), and Photobook Set-up*
(
=
184).
Invalid selection range
When specifying a range for image selection (
=
116,
=
119,
=
183), you
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the nal image, or vice-versa.
Exceeded selection limit
More than 998 images were selected for Print List (
=
182) or Photobook Set-up
(
=
184). Choose 998 images or less.
Print List (
=
182) or Photobook Set-up (
=
184) settings could not be saved
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (
=
115), Erase
(
=
118), Favorites (
=
121), Print List (
=
182), or Photobook Set-up
(
=
184).
Naming error!
The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders
has been reached. On the [
1] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]
(
=
159), or format the memory card (
=
160).
Lens Error
This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is
used in dusty or sandy locations.
Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Shooting or Playback
No memory card
The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
card facing the correct way (
=
19).
Memory card locked
The write-protect switch of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch
the write-protect switch to the unlocked position (
=
19).
Cannot record!
Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
memory card facing the correct way (
=
19).
Memory card error (
=
160)
If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
supported memory card (
=
2) and have inserted it facing the correct way
(
=
19), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Insufcient space on card
There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (
=
35,
=
58,
=
77,
=
96) or edit images (
=
123). Either erase unneeded images
(
=
118) or insert a memory card with enough free space (
=
19).
Touch AF unavailable
Touch AF is not available in the current shooting mode (
=
193).
Touch AF canceled
The subject selected for Touch AF can no longer be detected (
=
90).
Charge the battery (
=
18)
No Image.
The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Protected! (
=
115)
190
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth
devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
Sending failed
Memory card error
If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk.
Receiving failed
Insufcient space on card
There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memory card with sufcient space.
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
The write-protect switch of the memory card in the camera to receive the images
is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked
position.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Insufcient space on server
Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create
space.
Save the images sent via Image Sync (
=
153) to your computer.
Check network settings
Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
A camera error was detected (error number)
If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk.
File Error
Correct printing (
=
178) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Print error
Check the paper size setting (
=
180). If this error message is displayed when
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera
again.
Ink absorber full
Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink
absorber replacement.
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (
=
141).
A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Cannot determine access point
The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
reconnecting again.
No access points found
Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
Check the access point security settings (
=
141).
IP address conict
Reset the IP address so that it does not conict with another.
191
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
(17) Movie quality (
=
51)
(18) Remaining time (
=
212)
(19) Histogram (
=
107)
(20) Quick Set menu (
=
30)
(21) Focus range (
=
84,
=
85),
AF lock (
=
91)
(22) AF frame (
=
87), Spot AE point
frame (
=
78)
(23) Grid lines (
=
100)
(24) AE lock (
=
78), FE lock
(
=
93)
(25) Shutter speed (
=
96,
=
97)
(26) Aperture value (
=
97,
=
97)
(27) Electronic level (
=
52)
(28) Exposure level (
=
97)
(29) ISO speed (
=
79)
(30) DR correction (
=
81)
(31) Hybrid Auto mode (
=
37)
(32) Touch Shutter (
=
43)
(33) Camera shake warning (
=
38)
(34) Zoom bar (
=
35)
(35) Wind filter (
=
75)
(36) Time zone (
=
162)
(37) Image stabilization (
=
54)
(38) Display mode (
=
28)
(39)
Auto Level (
=
54)
(40)
Auto Slow Shutter (
=
74)
(41) Attenuator (
=
75)
(42) MF indicator (
=
85)
(43) Exposure compensation (
=
78)
* In [ ] mode, indicates the number of shots available.
Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Display Details
Sufcient charge
Slightly depleted, but sufcient
(Blinking red)
Nearly depleted—charge the battery
pack soon
[Charge the battery]
Depleted—charge the battery pack
immediately
On-Screen Information
Shooting (Information Display)
The same information is shown on the viewnder.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
7
)
(
10
)
(
9
)
(
6
)
(
12
)(
13
)(
14
) (
15
)(
16
) (
17
) (
18
) (
19
)
(
20
)
(
21
)
(
22
)
(
23
)
(
42
)
(
43
)
(
25
)
(
31
)
(
33
)
(
26
) (
28
)(
27
) (
29
)
(
35
)
(
36
)
(
34
)
(
30
)
(
11
)
(
24
)
(
8
)
(
32
)
(
37
) (
38
)
(
39
)
(
40
) (
41
)
(1) Shooting mode (
=
193), Scene
icon (
=
39)
(2) Flash mode (
=
91)
(3) Flash exposure compensation
/ Flash output level (
=
92,
=
99)
(4) Shadow correction (
=
81)
(5) Metering method (
=
78)
(6) Eco mode (
=
161)
(7) ND filter (
=
81), High ISO NR
(
=
80)
(8) Self-timer (
=
42)
(9) Drive mode (
=
44), AEB
shooting (
=
80), Focus
bracketing (
=
86)
(10) White balance (
=
82), Mercury
lamp correction (
=
51)
(11) My Colors (
=
83)
(12) IS mode icon (
=
40)
(13) Battery level (
=
191)
(14) Still image compression (
=
94),
Recording pixel setting (
=
94)
(15) Recordable shots (
=
212)*
(16) Zoom magnification (
=
41),
Digital tele-converter (
=
87)
192
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
(28) DR correction (
=
81)
(29) Shadow correction (
=
81)
(30) Image quality / Frame rate
(movies) (
=
51)
(31) Group playback (
=
112)
(32) Compression (image quality)
(
=
94) / Recording pixel
setting (
=
51), Digest movies
(
=
37), RAW (
=
94), MP4
(movies), Albums (
=
129)
(33) Still images: Recording pixel
setting (
=
212)
Movies: Playback time (
=
212)
(34) File size
Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (
=
170).
Playback (Detailed Information Display)
(
1
) (
3
)(
2
)
(
4
) (
5
) (
6
)(
7
) (
8
)(
9
)(
10
)(
11
) (
12
) (
13
)
(
14
) (
15
) (
16
) (
17
) (
18
)
(
19
)
(
26
) (
28
) (
30
) (
32
)
(
27
) (
29
) (
31
)
(
33
) (
34
)
(
20
) (
21
) (
22
) (
23
) (
24
) (
25
)
(1) Movies (
=
35,
=
105)
(2) Digest movies (
=
108)
(3) Group playback (
=
112)
(4) Current image no. / Total no. of
images
(5) Histogram (
=
107)
(6) Battery level (
=
191)
(7) Wi-Fi signal strength (
=
152)
(8) Image Sync (
=
153)
(9) Image editing (
=
123), Movie
compression (
=
128)
(10) Favorites (
=
121)
(11) Protection (
=
115)
(12) Folder number - File number
(
=
159)
(13) Shooting date/time (
=
20)
(14) Shooting mode (
=
193)
(15) Shutter speed (
=
96,
=
97)
(16) Aperture value (
=
97,
=
97)
(17) Exposure compensation level
(
=
78)
(18) ISO speed (
=
79)
(19) Metering method (
=
78)
(20) Flash (
=
91), Flash exposure
compensation (
=
92)
(21) White balance (
=
82)
(22) White balance correction
(
=
82), Mercury lamp
correction (
=
51
), Creative Shot
effect (
=
59)
(23) My Colors (
=
83,
=
125)
(24) Focus range (
=
84,
=
85)
(25) ND filter (
=
81)
(26) Red-eye correction (
=
126),
Short clip playback effect
(
=
75)
(27) High ISO NR (
=
80)
193
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Functions and Menu Tables
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Icons in black, such as , indicate that the function is available or
automatically set in that shooting mode.
Gray icons, such as , indicate that the function is unavailable in that
shooting mode.
Exposure Compensation (
=
78)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
ISO Speed (
=
79)
Auto
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
125 – 12800
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
AF Operation (
=
89)
ONE SHOT
*
1
/ / / / / / *
2
/ / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
SERVO
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Summary of Movie Control Panel
The following operations are available on the movie control panel,
accessed as described in “Viewing” (
=
105).
Touch to display the volume panel, and then touch [ ][ ] to
adjust the volume. At a volume of 0, [ ] is displayed.
Play
Slow Motion (To adjust the playback speed, press the [ ][ ]
buttons or turn the [ ] dial. No sound is played.)
Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (
=
128) (To continue skipping
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ ]
button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (
=
128) (To continue skipping
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected,
=
128)
Edit (
=
127)
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (
=
178).
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the
previous or next clip) by pressing the [
][ ] buttons.
194
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Flash (
=
91)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / *
3
/ *
3
/ / / / / / /
/ *
3
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Flash Exposure Compensation (
=
92)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Flash Output Level (
=
99)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Bracketing (
=
80,
=
86)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Drive Mode (
=
44)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
195
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Focus Range (
=
84,
=
85)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Manual Focus Switching When Recording Movies (
=
73)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Move AF Frame (
=
88)
Center
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Periphery
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / *
5
/ *
5
/
*
5
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Touch AF (
=
90)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / *
5
/ *
5
/
*
5
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Av/Tv Settings (
=
96,
=
97)
Aperture Value
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Shutter Speed
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Bulb Setting
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Program Shift (
=
78)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
AE Lock/FE Lock in Standby (
=
78,
=
93)*
4
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
AE Lock (during recording)/Exposure Compensation (
=
74)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
AF Lock (when assigned to the [ ] or movie button) (
=
91)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
196
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Quick Set Menu
AF method (
=
87)
+Tracking
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
1-point AF
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Image quality
For details, see “Shooting Tab” (
=
199).
Movie Quality (
=
51,
=
52)
When Set to NTSC
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Face Select (
=
89)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Touch Shutter (
=
43)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ *
6
/ / / *
6
/ / / / / / / / / /
/
Change Display (
=
29)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 [SERVO] when subject movement is detected.
*3 Not available, but switches to [
] in some cases.
*4 FE lock not available in [
] ash mode.
*5 Only when [
] is selected.
*6 Only available for shooting. Subject designation not available.
197
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Self-Timer (
=
42)
/ / /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Self-Timer Settings (
=
43)
Delay*
3
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Shots*
4
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
ND Filter (
=
81)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / *
2
/ / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / *
2
/ / / / / / / / /
/
When Set to PAL
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / *
2
/ / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / *
2
/ / / / / / / / /
/
198
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
WB Correction (
=
82)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Color Adjustment (
=
72)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
My Colors (
=
83)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
/ / *
6
/ *
6
/ / / / / / / *
7
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
DR Correction (
=
81)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Still Image Aspect Ratio (
=
50)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / *
5
/ /
*
5
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
White Balance (
=
82)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
/ / / / / / /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
199
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Shooting Tab
[ 1] Tab
Rec. Mode (
=
60,
=
61,
=
73)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
Image quality (
=
50,
=
94)
JPEG
/ / / /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
RAW
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Shadow Correct (
=
81)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Light Metering (
=
78)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (
=
64).
*3 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*4 One shot (cannot be modied) in modes without selection of the number of
shots.
*5 Automatically set, matching the aspect ratio specied in [Movie rec. size].
*6 White balance is not available.
*7 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue,
and skin tone.
200
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Display Mode (
=
28)
Display priority
Power Saving
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Smooth
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
VF display
Normal
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Fast
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
VF display format (
=
28)
Display 1/Display 2
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Still Image Aspect Ratio (
=
50)
For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (
=
196).
Shooting information display (
=
100)
Screen info/ toggle settings / VF info/ toggle settings
Shooting Info/Histogram/Grid display/Electronic Level
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
VF vertical display
On/Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Grid display
Grid 1
/Grid 2
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Reverse Display (
=
20)
On/Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
201
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Disable
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Face ID Settings (
=
45)
On/Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Function Assignment (
=
101)
[
] ring/[ ] dial/[ ] dial/[ ] button/[ ] button
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
[ ] button
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
[ ] button
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Quick setting menu layout (
=
102)
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Save Settings (
=
103)
Destination C
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
[ 2] Tab
Review image after shooting (
=
56)
Display Time
Off/Quick
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
2 sec./4 sec./8 sec.
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Hold
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Display Info
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Detailed
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Touch Shutter (
=
43)
Enable
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
202
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
AF-Point Zoom (
=
53)
On
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
AF operation (
=
89)
For details, see “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode”
(
=
193).
AF method (
=
87)
For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (
=
196).
AF Frame Size (
=
88)*
2
Normal
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Small
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Continuous AF (
=
89)
On
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Auto Slow Shutter (
=
74)
Enable
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Disable
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
[ 3] Tab
Digital Zoom (
=
41)
Standard
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Lock
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
1.6x/2.0x
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
203
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
MF Peaking Settings (
=
86)
Peaking
On/Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Level
Low/High
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Color
Red/Yellow/Blue
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
IS Settings (
=
54)
IS Mode
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Continuous
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
AF-assist Beam (
=
55)
On
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
[ 4] Tab
MF-Point Zoom (
=
85)
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
5x/10x
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Safety MF (
=
85)
On
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
204
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Rate of Change
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
DR Correction (
=
81)
For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (
=
196).
Shadow Correct (
=
81)
For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (
=
196).
Light Metering (
=
78)
For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (
=
196).
ND Filter (
=
81)
For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (
=
196).
Flash Control (
=
56,
=
92,
=
93,
=
99)
Flash Mode
Auto
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Manual
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Flash Exp. Comp
For details, see “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode”
(
=
193).
Flash Output
For details, see “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode”
(
=
193).
Shoot Only
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Dynamic IS
Low
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Standard
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
High
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
Bracketing (
=
86)
For details, see “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode”
(
=
193).
[ 5] Tab
ISO speed (
=
80)
ISO Speed
For details, see “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode”
(
=
193).
ISO Auto Settings
Max ISO Speed
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
205
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Save Stills (
=
70)
On/Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
Star Time-Lapse Movie Setting (
=
70)
Effect
/ / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
Shot Interval
15 sec./30 sec./1 min.
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
Frame Rate
/ (NTSC), / (PAL)
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
Shooting Time
60 min./90 min./120 min./Unlimited
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
Shutter Sync.
1st-curtain
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
2nd-curtain
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Red-Eye Lamp
On/Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Safety FE
On
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Star Emphasis (
=
68)
Sharp/Off/Soft
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
206
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Star Portrait Settings (
=
67)
Star Visibility
Standard/Prominent
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
[ 7] Tab
Blink Detection (
=
53)
On
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Digest Type (
=
37)
Include Stills/No Stills
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
[ 6] Tab
WB Correction (
=
82)
For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (
=
196).
My Colors (
=
125)
For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (
=
196).
High ISO NR (
=
80)
Low/Standard/High
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Hg Lamp Corr. (
=
51)
On/Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
Spot AE Point (
=
78)
Center/AF Point
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Safety Shift (
=
97)
On
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
207
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Disable
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
*1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode.
*2 Available when the AF frame is set to [1-point].
*3 [Enable] for functions other than Creative Zone and movies.
Set Up Tab
Tab Item
Reference
Page
1
Create Folder
=
159
File Numbering
=
159
Format
=
160
Video system
=
160
Display settings
=
28
Electronic Level
=
52
Start-up Image
=
164
2
Eco Mode
=
161
Power Saving
=
27
Disp. Brightness
=
162
Night Display
=
161
Time Zone
=
162
Date/Time
=
163
Lens Retraction
=
163
[ 8] Tab
Movie Quality (
=
51)
For details, see “Quick Set Menu” (
=
196).
Wind Filter (
=
75)
Auto
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Attenuator (
=
75)
On/Off
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Auto
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
Auto level (
=
54)
Enable
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / / / / /
/
208
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Playback Tab
Tab Item
Reference
Page
1
Protect
=
115
Rotate
=
120
Erase
=
118
Favorites
=
121
Slideshow
=
114
2
Album Playback
=
129
List/Play Digest Movies
=
109
Play Creative Shot Movies
=
108
Short Clip Mix
=
132
Image Search
=
110
3
i-Contrast
=
125
Resize
=
123
Cropping
=
124
Red-Eye Correction
=
126
My Colors
=
125
Face ID Info
=
109
4
Print settings
=
182
Photobook Set-up
=
184
5
Transition Effect
=
105
Index Effect
=
109
Scroll Display
=
105
Group Images
=
112
Auto Rotate
=
120
Resume
=
105
Image jump with
=
111
Tab Item
Reference
Page
3
Language
=
163
Mute
=
163
Volume
=
164
Sound Options
=
164
Hints & Tips
=
164
4
Touch Operation
=
164
Units
=
164
Wi-Fi Settings
=
133
Mobile Device Connect Button
=
136
Certication Logo Display
=
165
Copyright Info
=
165
Reset All
=
165
My Menu Tab
Tab Item
Reference
Page
1
My Menu settings
=
104
209
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Handling Precautions
The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic elds, which may cause malfunction
or erase image data.
If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with
a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply
force.
Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difcult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to
warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic
bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it
from the bag.
If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove
the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has
evaporated before resuming use.
Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container. To
maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for
some time, about once a year charge it and then use the camera until
it runs out of power before storing the battery pack.
Tab Item
Reference
Page
6
Set Touch Actions
=
122
Print Tab
Item Reference Page
Print
Select Images & Qty.
=
182
Select Range
=
183
Select All Images
=
183
Clear All Selections
=
183
Print Settings
=
182
210
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Continuous Shooting
Speed
(Varies depending on the subject,
zoom position, and other shooting
factors, as well as memory card
brands.)
............................................. One-Shot AF:
Approx. 5.9 shots/sec.
Servo AF: Approx. 4.4 shots/sec.
Built-in Flash
Metering Range (Wide angle end) ....50 cm – 7.0 m (1.6 – 23 ft.)
Metering Range (Telephoto end) ......50 cm – 4.0 m (1.6 – 13 ft.)
Shutter Speed
Auto Mode (Auto Settings)................1 – 1/2000 sec.
Other Modes Combined....................30 – 1/2000 sec., bulb supported
Aperture
f/number............................................ 1.8 – 11 (W)
2.8 – 11 (T)
AF Type ................................................ 1-point, Face+Tracking
(AF points: up to 31)
File Format ............................................ Design rule for Camera File
system, DPOF (version 1.1)
compliant
Data Type (Still Images)
Image File Format.............................Exif 2.3 (DCF 2.0)
Image Formats.................................. JPEG, RAW (CR2, a Canon 14-bit
RAW format)
Data Type (Movies)
Recording Format ............................. MP4
Video .................................................MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio.................................................MPEG-4 AAC LC (stereo)
Power Source
Battery Pack .....................................NB-13L
Charging via USB ............................. Using Compact Power Adapter
CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
AC Adapter Kit ..................................ACK-DC110
Specications
Camera
Image Sensor
Camera Effective Pixels
(Some image processing may use
fewer pixels)
.......................................Approx. 20.2 million pixels
Total Pixels........................................Approx. 20.9 million pixels
Image Size ........................................ 1.0-inch type
Lens
Focal Length
(35mm lm equivalent) .......................... 8.8 – 36.8 mm (24 – 100 mm)
Zoom Factor .....................................4.2x
Digital Zoom
Maximum with Optical Zoom ............Approx. 17x
Focal Length
(Telephoto end, 35mm lm equivalent) .....Approx. 400 mm
ZoomPlus
(L size) ................................................Approx. 8.4x
Viewnder ............................................. Electronic viewnder
Effective Pixels:
Approx. 2,360,000 dots
Screen Size: 0.39-type
Coverage: Approx. 100%
Eyepoint: 22 mm
Dioptric Adjustment:
−3.0 to +1.0 m
-1
(dpt)
Screen (Monitor)
Type .................................................. Color TFT LCD
Screen Size ......................................7.5 cm (3.0 in.)
Effective Pixels .................................Approx. 1,040,000 dots
211
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time
Number of Shots
Screen On Approx. 210
Viewnder On Approx. 215
Number of Shots
(Eco Mode On)
Screen On Approx. 320
Movie Recording
Time (Actual
Use)*
1
Screen On Approx. 40 minutes
Viewnder On Approx. 40 minutes
Movie Recording
Time (Continuous
Shooting)*
2
Screen On Approx. 1 hour 10 minutes
Viewnder On Approx. 1 hour 10 minutes
Playback Time*
3
Approx. 4 hours
*1 Total time when shooting repeatedly under the following conditions:
- In [
] mode, with all other settings set to defaults
- With recording, stopping, zooming, and turning the camera on and off
*2 Total time when shooting repeatedly under the following conditions:
- In [
] mode, with all other settings set to defaults
- Automatically stop/resume after the time or capacity per recording is reached
*3 Time when playing back a slideshow of still images.
Shooting Range
Shooting
Mode
Focus
Range
Maximum Wide Angle
(
)
Maximum Telephoto
( )
5 cm (2.0 in.) – innity 40 cm (1.3 ft.) – innity
Other
modes
5 cm (2.0 in.) – innity 40 cm (1.3 ft.) – innity
*
5 – 50 cm
(2.0 in. – 1.6 ft.)
* Not available in some shooting modes.
Interface
Wired ................................................USB (Micro-B), HDMI (Type D)
Wireless ............................................ Specications: IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Frequency: 2.4 GHz
Channels: 1 – 11
Security: WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/
TKIP), WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)
Operating Environment
Temperatures ....................................0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Dimensions (WxHxD) ........................... 112.4 x 76.4 x 44.2 mm
(4.43 x 3.01 x 1.74 in.)
Weight
Including Battery Pack,
Memory Card ....................................Approx. 377 g (13.3 oz.)
Camera Only.....................................Approx. 353 g (12.5 oz.)
212
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Recording Time per Memory Card
Size
Frame Rate/
Video System
Recording Time
per 16 GB Memory
Card (Approx.)
Recording Time
for Individual
Movies (Approx.)
(1920 x 1080)
(NTSC)
(PAL)
59 min. 30 sec. 29 min. 59 sec.
,
(NTSC)
(PAL)
1 hr. 26 min. 05 sec. 29 min. 59 sec.
(1280 x 720)
(NTSC)
(PAL)
4 hr. 05 min. 15 sec. 29 min. 59 sec.
(640 x 480)
(NTSC)
(PAL)
10 hr. 22 min. 35 sec.
1 hr.
The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
Recording times for individual movies are based on memory cards
rated at an SD speed class of 10. Recording may stop when cards
rated at lower speed classes are used. Recording will also stop
automatically when the le size reaches 4 GB, or when the card
becomes full.
Number of Shots per Memory Card
The number of shots at an aspect ratio (
=
50) of 3:2 per memory card
is as follows. Note that the number of shots available varies by aspect
ratio.
Number of shots per 16 GB memory card (approx. shots)
1786
2999
2857
4810
8377
14724
48592
69418
RAW 610
The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
213
Before Use
Index
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Battery Pack NB-13L
Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Nominal Voltage: 3.6 V DC
Nominal Capacity: 1250 mAh
Charging Cycles: Approx. 300 times
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Battery Charger CB-2LH/CB-2LHE
Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.09 A (100 V) – 0.06 A (240 V)
Rated Output: 4.2 V DC, 0.7 A
Charging Time: Approx. 2 hr. 10 min. (when using NB-13L)
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Compact Power Adapter CA-DC30/CA-DC30E
Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
0.07 A (100 V) – 0.045 A (240 V)
Rated Output: 5.0 V DC, 0.55 A
Charging Time: Approx. 5 hr.*
(when charged with NB-13L in the camera)
* Charging time varies greatly depending on the
remaining battery level.
Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
Size, weight, and number of shots available are based on
measurement guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products
Association (CIPA).
Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording
time may be less than mentioned above.
Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
214
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Index
A
AC adapter kit 169, 171
Accessories 169
AEB shooting 80
AE lock 78
AF frames 87
AF lock 91
AF method 87
Aspect ratio 50
Auto mode (shooting mode) 22, 35
Av (shooting mode) 97
B
Background defocus
(shooting mode) 65
Batteries
Date/time (date/time
battery)
Battery charger 2, 169
Battery pack
Charging 18
Eco mode 161
Level 191
Power saving 27
Black and white images 83
Blink detection 53
C
Camera
Reset all 165
Camera access point mode 139
Camera Connect 134
CameraWindow 176
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 145
Clock 34
Color (white balance) 82
Compression 94
Connecting via an access point 141
Continuous shooting 40, 44
Creative shot 58
Cropping 124, 180
Custom white balance 82
D
Date/time
Changing 21
Date/time battery 21
Settings 20
World clock 162
DC coupler 171
Defaults
Reset all
Digital tele-converter 87
Digital zoom 41
Display language 22
DPOF 182
Dragging 17
Dynamic Range Correction 81
E
Eco mode 161
Editing
Cropping 124
i-Contrast 125
My Colors 125
Red-eye correction 126
Resizing images 123
Editing or erasing connection
information 156
Electronic level 52
Erasing 118
Erasing all 118
Error messages 189
Exposure
AE lock 78
Compensation 78
FE lock 93
F
Face ID 45
Face select 89
Favorites 121
FE lock 93
File numbering 159
Fireworks (shooting mode) 60
Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 63
Flash
Deactivating ash 92
Flash exposure compensation 92
On 91
Slow synchro 92
Focus bracketing 86
Focus check 114
Focusing
AF frames 87
AF lock 91
AF-point zoom 53
MF peaking 86
Servo AF 89
Touch AF 90
Focus lock 87
Focus range
Macro 84
Manual focus 85
G
Geotagging images 155
GPS information display 107
Grid lines 100
H
Handheld nightscene
(shooting mode) 60
HDMI cable 170
High dynamic range
(shooting mode) 62
High ISO NR 80
Household power 171
Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) 37
I
i-Contrast 125
iFrame movies (movie mode) 76
Image quality
Compression
Images
Display period 56
Erasing 118
Playback
Viewing
Protecting 115
Image stabilization 54, 95
Image Sync 153
Indicator 33, 55, 56
ISO speed 79
J
Jump display 111
M
M (shooting mode) 97
Macro (focus range) 84
Magnied display 114
Manual focus (focus range) 85
Manual (movie mode) 99
Memory cards 2
Recording time 212
215
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Short clips (movie mode) 75
Slideshow 114
Soft focus (shooting mode) 66
Software
Installation 140, 177
Saving images to
a computer 177
Sounds 163
Standard (movie mode) 73
Star (shooting mode) 67
Star nightscape
(shooting mode) 68
Star time-lapse movie
(shooting mode) 70
Star trails (shooting mode) 69
Story Highlights 129
Strap 2
Super vivid (shooting mode) 61
T
Terminal 170, 178
Touch Actions 122
Touch AF 90
Touching 17
Touch-screen panel 17
Touch Shutter 43
Toy camera effect
(shooting mode) 65
Traveling with the camera 162
Troubleshooting 185
TV display 170
Tv (shooting mode) 96
V
Viewing 24
Image search 110
Index display 109
Jump display 111
Magnied display 114
Single-image display 24
Slideshow 114
TV display 170
W
White balance (color) 82
Wi-Fi functions 133
Wi-Fi menu 137
Wind lter 75
World clock 162
Z
Zoom 22, 36, 41, 42
Menu
Basic operations 31
Table 193
Mercury lamp correction 51
Metering method 78
Miniature effect (shooting mode) 64
Mobile device connection button 136
Monochrome (shooting mode) 66
Movies
Editing 127
Image quality (recording pixels/
frame rate) 51
Recording time 212
Multi-area White Balance 51
My Colors 83, 125
N
ND lter 81
Neck strap
Strap
Nostalgic (shooting mode) 63
P
P (shooting mode) 77
Package contents 2
Photobook set-up 184
PictBridge 170, 178
Playback
Viewing
Portrait (shooting mode) 60
Poster effect (shooting mode) 61
Power 169
AC adapter kit,
Battery charger,
Battery pack
Power saving 27
Printing 178
Program AE 77
Protecting 115
Q
Quick Set menu
Table 196
R
RAW 94
Recording pixels (image size) 50, 94
Red-eye correction 126
Remote shooting 155
Reset all 165
Resizing images 123
Rotating 120
S
Saving images to a computer 177
Screen
Display language 22
Icons 191, 192
Menu
Quick Set menu, Menu
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
Memory cards
Searching 110
Self portrait (shooting mode) 61
Self-timer 42
2-second self-timer 43
Customizing the self-timer 43
Sending images 149
Sending images to
another camera 149
Sending images to a smartphone 134
Sending images to Web services 145
Sepia tone images 83
Servo AF 89
Shadow correction 81
Shooting
Shooting date/time
Date/time
Shooting information 100, 191
216
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions
Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use
- Use of WLAN is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal
use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid
violating WLAN regulations, visit the Canon website to check where
use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
use in other countries and regions.
Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
- Altering or modifying the product
- Removing the certication labels from the product
According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations,
export permission (or service transaction permission) from the
Japanese government is necessary to export strategic resources or
services (including this product) outside Japan.
Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls
under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported
to or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be
erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio
waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that
Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss
of earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.
When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and
reset the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.
Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this
product due to loss or theft of the product.
Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other
than as described in this guide.
Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical
equipment or other electronic equipment.
Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
This product may receive interference from other devices that emit
radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far
away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the
same time as this product.
Security Precautions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays
the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use
(unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to
connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized
access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and
do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks.
217
Camera Basics
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Tv, Av, M, and C Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Index
Trademarks and Licensing
Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Wi-Fi
®
, Wi-Fi Alliance
®
, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc.
in the United States and in other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or
decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for
a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant
video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4
standard.
Disclaimer
Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specications and appearance.
Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product.
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions
and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard
to cover their tracks when inltrating other systems).
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS
over IP enables PictBridge connections in network
environments, and the camera is also compatible with
this standard.
1

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Canon-PowerShot-G5X
  • ik wil graag met een externe microfoon bij het filmen met de gx 5 werken. Kan dat? Gesteld op 5-5-2022 om 09:55

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
  • Hoe is het mogelijk om met de g5x time Lapse opnames te maken. In de handleiding op pagina 70 staat hoe dit zou moeten, maar ik krijg de daar getoonde icoontjes niet in beeld. Wie heeft hier ervaring mee? Gesteld op 10-10-2020 om 15:45

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
  • 'k heb net een Canon PowerShot G5X gekocht. Nu hebben mijn foto's een zeer blauwige waas(ik heb met automatische modus gefotografeerd). Ik hoop niet dat het typisch is voor die Canons. Heeft iemand daar zelfde ervaring mee? Bedankt voor een antwoord Gesteld op 23-7-2018 om 10:34

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
    • Ik denk niet dat het aan de camera ligt maar aan luchtvervuiling. Ik heb vorige maand (juni) dezelfde camera gekocht en prachtige heldere foto's geschoten maar op de foto's van 19 juli zit ook een grijzige waas en dat terwijl de zon uitbundig scheen, ff op een regenbuitje wachten...... Geantwoord op 23-7-2018 om 23:46

      Waardeer dit antwoord (7) Misbruik melden
  • Ik zou de witbalans instelling eens checken.. Geantwoord op 30-12-2024 om 19:21

    Waardeer dit antwoord Misbruik melden
  • 16-6-2018 heb ik mooie foto's en films gemaakt van de trouwdag van mijn dochter. 's Avonds alle foto's en film zitten te bekijken. De volgende morgen kon ik geen beelden meer vinden. De geheugenkaart in de laptop gedaan, en zag toen tot mijn grote schrik dat er niets meer op de geheugenkaart stond.
    Gr, André Flinterman Gesteld op 17-6-2018 om 15:59

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden
  • Heb pas de Canonpowershot G5X gekocht. De flitser klapt niet automatisch ui???? Gesteld op 29-1-2017 om 10:28

    Reageer op deze vraag Misbruik melden

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Canon PowerShot G5X bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Canon PowerShot G5X in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 21,4 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Canon PowerShot G5X

Canon PowerShot G5X Snelstart handleiding - Nederlands - 11 pagina's

Canon PowerShot G5X Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 217 pagina's

Canon PowerShot G5X Snelstart handleiding - Deutsch - 11 pagina's

Canon PowerShot G5X Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 217 pagina's

Canon PowerShot G5X Snelstart handleiding - English - 11 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info